JP7220177B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine for executing games.

Patent Document 1 describes a so-called 1 type 2 type mixing machine, and when hitting left, the game is advanced by entering the game ball into the starting port of the first special symbol, but the passing in the left area It is described that when the game ball passes through the part, the start opening of the second special symbol in the right area is opened.

JP 2015-208334 A

In recent years, there has been a demand for a gaming machine in which an outer rail can be attached accurately and easily while reducing discomfort in performance.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION Accordingly, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of accurately and easily attaching an outer rail while reducing discomfort in performance.

The present invention employs the following solutions to solve the problems described above. It should be noted that the following expressions in parentheses are merely examples, and the present invention is not limited thereto. Further, the present invention can be an invention that includes at least one of the invention-specifying matters shown in the following means for solving the problem. Furthermore, each of the matters specifying the invention shown in the following solutions can be converted into a higher-level concept by adding elements that limit the matters specifying the invention, or can be made into a higher-level concept by deleting elements that limit the matters specifying the invention. .

Solution Means 1: The gaming machine of this solution means comprises first lottery execution means for executing a first lottery when a first lottery opportunity occurs, and variably displaying a first pattern when the first lottery is executed. After that, a first symbol display means for stop-displaying the first symbols in a manner according to the result of the first lottery, and a second lottery opportunity different from the first lottery opportunity in a predetermined game state, the Difficulty making means for making the occurrence less likely than the first lottery opportunity, second lottery execution means for executing the second lottery when the second lottery opportunity occurs, and second pattern when the second lottery is executed. after variably displaying the second pattern display means for stop-displaying the second pattern in a manner according to the result of the second lottery; and in the predetermined game state, a specific effect based on the second lottery opportunity A specific effect executing means is provided, and the specific effect is not executed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, even if the second lottery opportunity occurs in the predetermined game state. It is a game machine.

The gaming machine of this solving means has the following configuration.
(1) When the first lottery opportunity occurs (when the game ball enters the start winning opening of the first special symbol), the first lottery (first special symbol lottery) is executed.
(2) When the first lottery of (1) above is executed, after the first symbol (first special symbol) is variably displayed, the first lottery is drawn in a manner according to the result of the first lottery of (1) above. Stop displaying the pattern.

(3) A second lottery opportunity (lottery opportunity for the second special symbol lottery) that is different from the first lottery opportunity (lottery opportunity for the first special symbol lottery) in a predetermined game state (for example, non-time shortening state), A difficulty-improving means is provided to make it less likely to occur than the first lottery opportunity.

(4) When the second lottery opportunity of (3) above occurs (when the game ball enters the start winning opening of the second special symbol), the second lottery (second special symbol lottery) is executed.
(5) When the second lottery of (4) above is executed, after the second symbol (second special symbol) is variably displayed, a second lottery is drawn in a manner according to the result of the second lottery of (4) above. Stop displaying the pattern.

(6) In the predetermined gaming state of (3) above, a specific effect (search challenge icon display effect) based on the second lottery opportunity can be executed. The specific effect based on the second lottery opportunity may be an effect executed based on the occurrence of the second lottery opportunity in a predetermined game state, and in a game state (time shortening state) other than the predetermined game state. It may be an effect that is executed based on the occurrence of the second lottery opportunity.
(7) The specific effect of (6) above is when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when a variation by a special variation pattern is executed, when a predetermined lottery is won, etc.), the predetermined effect of (3) above Even if the second lottery opportunity of (3) above occurs in the game state of (3), it is not executed.

According to this solving means, in a predetermined game state, the specific performance based on the second lottery opportunity is basically executed, but depending on the case, the specific performance is not executed, so that if the specific performance is executed, a sense of incongruity will occur. In such a scene, it is possible to prevent execution of the specific effect, and it is possible to reduce discomfort in the effect.

Solution 2: In any one of the above-described solution means, the gaming machine of the present solution means selects a special variation pattern different from the predetermined variation pattern as the variation pattern of the second symbol for the predetermined condition. It is a gaming machine characterized by the condition that

In this means for solving the problem, the predetermined condition is, as the variation pattern of the second symbol, a special variation pattern (a variation having a shorter variation time than the predetermined variation pattern) different from the predetermined variation pattern (a variation pattern having a long variation time). pattern) is selected.

According to this solution means, since the predetermined condition is a condition that a special variation pattern different from the predetermined variation pattern is selected as the variation pattern of the second symbol, the special variation pattern is set. Thus, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a situation in which the originally intended performance cannot be executed, and as a result, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity in the performance.

Solution 3: The game machine of the present solution is a variation that enables selection of a variation pattern having a variation time during which the specific effect cannot be executed when the predetermined condition is satisfied in any of the above-described solution. The game machine is characterized by comprising pattern selection means.

In this solution means, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, it is possible to select a variation pattern (a variation pattern corresponding to a short variation) having a variation time during which a specific effect cannot be executed. When the predetermined condition is not satisfied, it is possible to select a variation pattern having a variation time during which a specific effect can be executed (a variation pattern corresponding to a long variation having a longer variation time than a short variation).

According to this means for solving, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, since it is possible to select a variation pattern having a variation time during which the specific performance cannot be executed, it is possible to prevent the specific performance from being executed in an unintended situation. , can also be avoided by selecting a variation pattern.

Solution means F1: The gaming machine of this solution means comprises first lottery execution means for executing a first lottery when a first lottery opportunity occurs, and variably displaying a first symbol when the first lottery is executed. After that, a first symbol display means for stop-displaying the first symbols in a manner according to the result of the first lottery, and a second lottery opportunity different from the first lottery opportunity in a predetermined game state, the Difficulty making means for making the occurrence less likely than the first lottery opportunity, second lottery execution means for executing the second lottery when the second lottery opportunity occurs, and second pattern when the second lottery is executed. after variably displaying the second pattern display means for stop-displaying the second pattern in a manner according to the result of the second lottery; and in the predetermined game state, a specific effect based on the second lottery opportunity and a specific effect executing means that enables execution, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the specific effect is not executed even if the second lottery opportunity occurs in the predetermined game state, and the game area is closed. and an outer rail provided on the game board, and the outer rail is formed with a plurality of predetermined guide portions for guiding the mounting position to the game board, and the outer rail is In the state provided on the game board, the range from the starting end to the left end of the outer rail is defined as a first range, the range from the left end to the upper end of the outer rail is defined as a second range, and the upper end of the outer rail is defined as a second range. Assuming that the range to the end is a third range, the number of the predetermined guide portions is greater in the first range than in the second range, and is greater in the second range than in the third range. The game machine is characterized by having more than .

According to this solution, many predetermined guide parts are arranged on the side of the ball launching device where the impact received from the game ball is large and the accuracy of the placement of the outer rail is particularly required, and the outer rail on the side of the ball launching device is arranged. Displacement and vibration can be reliably prevented.
In addition, according to this solution means, fewer predetermined guide portions are arranged on the terminal end side of the outer rail, which is less impacted by the game ball and has less influence on the game, and the outer rail is processed and attached to the rail base. can be facilitated.
Furthermore, according to this means for solving the problem, the outer rail can be attached accurately and easily while reducing the sense of incongruity in the presentation.
In addition, the features of the above-described solution means 2 and 3 can be added to this solution means.
Then, according to each of the above-described solving means, it is possible to provide a novel gaming machine.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of accurately and easily attaching the outer rail while reducing discomfort in presentation.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a front view showing a game board unit alone. It is a figure which shows the detail of the 2nd variable winning device 31. FIG. It is a figure which shows the detail of the 2nd variable winning device 31. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the details of the starting device 400; FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the details of the starting device 400; FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the details of the starting device 400; FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the details of the starting device 400; FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the details of the starting device 400; FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the details of the starting device 400; FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the details of the starting device 400; FIG. It is a front view which expands and shows a part of game board unit. It is a block diagram showing various electronic devices installed in the pachinko machine. FIG. 11 is a flowchart (1/2) showing an example of a procedure of reset start processing; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart (2/2) showing an example of a procedure of reset start processing; FIG. 7 is a flowchart specifically showing an example of a procedure of power failure occurrence check processing; 6 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of interrupt management processing; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing an example of a procedure of switch input event processing; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of a 1st special design memory|storage update process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of a 2nd special design memory|storage update process. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of effect determination processing at the time of acquisition; FIG. It is a flow chart showing a configuration example of a special symbol game process. It is a flow chart showing a procedure example of special symbol variation pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of special design storage area shift processing. It is a figure which shows the structure row|line|column of the stop design selection table at the time of a 1st special design big hit. It is a figure which shows the structure row|line|column of the stop design selection table at the time of a 2nd special design big hit. It is a figure which shows an example of the stop design selection table at the time of a 2nd special design small hit. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a change pattern determination process at the time of loss; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of a process during a special design stop display. 6 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of display output management processing; It is a flowchart which shows the structural example of a variable prize-winning apparatus management process. 10 is a flow chart showing an example of a procedure of a special winning opening opening pattern setting process; It is a flow chart showing an example of a procedure of a big winning opening opening pattern setting process at the time of a big hit. It is a figure which shows an example of the opening pattern setting table classified by design at the time of a big hit. It is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the big winning opening opening pattern setting process at the time of a small hit. It is a figure which shows an example of an opening pattern setting table at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of a special prize opening opening-and-closing operation process. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing an example of a procedure of a second big winning opening opening/closing operation process; FIG. 9 is a flow chart showing an example of a procedure of specific area opening/closing operation processing; 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of processing when passing through a specific area; It is a figure which shows an example of the opening pattern setting table classified by design at the time of passing through a specific area. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of a 1st big winning a prize opening-and-closing operation process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of a special winning opening closing process. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure for termination processing; 7 is a flow chart showing an example of a procedure of solenoid management processing; 4 is a timing chart showing movement patterns of a starting device right solenoid 481 and a starting device left solenoid 491; It is a figure explaining the game flow developed when the 1st special design changes in normal mode. It is a figure explaining the game flow developed when the 2nd special design changes in normal mode. It is a figure explaining the game flow developed when the 1st special design changes in drive mode. It is a figure explaining the game flow developed when the 2nd special design changes in drive mode. FIG. 11 is a continuous diagram showing an example of effect images corresponding to variable display and stop display of special symbols (1/2); It is a continuation diagram showing an example of the effect image corresponding to the variable display and the stop display of the special symbol (2/2). It is a continuous diagram showing an example of the effect when the result of the normal symbol lottery in the non-time shortening state corresponds to the winning symbol 2 (1/4). It is a continuous diagram showing an example of the effect when the result of the normal symbol lottery in the non-time shortening state corresponds to the winning symbol 2 (2/4). It is a continuous diagram showing an example of the effect when the result of the normal symbol lottery in the non-time shortening state corresponds to the winning symbol 2 (3/4). It is a continuous diagram showing an example of the effect when the result of the normal symbol lottery in the non-time shortening state corresponds to the winning symbol 2 (4/4). It is a figure which shows the example of 1st production|presentation when a search challenge icon is not displayed (1/2). FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a first example of effect when search challenge icons are not displayed (2/2). (1/3) is a diagram showing a second example of effect when the search challenge icon is not displayed. (2/3) is a diagram showing a second effect example when the search challenge icon is not displayed. (3/3) is a diagram showing a second effect example when the search challenge icon is not displayed. It is a continuation diagram partially showing an example of an effect during a big role executed during a big hit game (1/2). It is a continuation diagram partially showing an example of an effect during a big role executed during a big hit game (2/2). It is a continuous diagram showing an example of the effect of the drive mode (1/3). It is a continuous diagram showing an example of the effect of the drive mode (2/3). It is a continuous diagram showing an example of the effect of the drive mode (3/3). It is a continuous diagram showing an example of the effect when the second special symbol is changed in the drive mode in the non-time reduction state (1/2). It is a continuous diagram showing an example of the effect when the second special symbol is changed in the drive mode in the non-time reduction state (2/2). FIG. 11 is a continuous diagram showing an example of the effect when the drive mode in the non-time reduction state is shifted to the normal mode in the non-time reduction state (1/3); It is a continuation diagram showing an example of an effect at the time of shifting from the drive mode in the non-time reduction state to the normal mode in the non-time reduction state (2/3). It is a continuation diagram which shows the example of the production|presentation at the time of shifting from the drive mode in a non-reduction-time state to the normal mode in a non-reduction-time state (3/3). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of production|presentation control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of operation memory production|presentation management processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of production|presentation design management processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of production|presentation design change pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of processing during a production|presentation design stop display. It is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of processing when the variable winning device is activated. It is a flow chart which shows the example of a procedure of other production processing during time saving and simulated time saving. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of a process at the time of a 2nd special design winning a prize. It is a front view of a pachinko machine of another embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine of other embodiments. It is a front view showing a game board unit of another embodiment alone. FIG. 82 is a schematic diagram showing a cross-sectional view taken along line AA of FIG. 81; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an outer rail; It is a figure which shows a game board, an outer rail, and a rail base. It is a figure which shows a mode that a game ball contacts an outer rail. It is a figure which shows an outer rail and a game board.

BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter abbreviated as "pachinko machine") 1. As shown in FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. The pachinko machine 1 uses game balls as game media. In the game on the pachinko machine 1, each game ball is a medium having a game value, and the benefits (profits) that the player enjoys as a result of the game are, for example, the game It can be converted into a game value based on the number of balls. Hereinafter, the overall configuration of the game machine will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2. FIG.

[Overall configuration of game machine]
The pachinko machine 1 mainly includes an outer frame unit 2, an integrated door unit 4 and an inner frame assembly 7 (plastic frame, game machine frame) as its main body. An integrated door unit 4 is located on the frontmost side when viewed from the front facing the player. The inner frame assembly 7 is positioned on the rear side (deep side) of the integrated door unit 4 , and the outer frame unit 2 is arranged so as to surround the outer side of the inner frame assembly 7 .

The outer frame unit 2 is a structure in which wood and metal materials are combined in a vertically long rectangular shape. It is fixed using In the vertically long rectangular outer frame unit 2, wood is used for the parts corresponding to the upper and lower short sides, and metal material is used for the parts corresponding to the left and right long sides.

The integrated door unit 4 has a structure in which the tray unit 6 is integrated at its lower position. The integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 are attached to the island facility via the outer frame unit 2, and each of these operates in an opening/closing manner via a hinge mechanism (not shown). The opening/closing axis of the hinge mechanism (not shown) extends vertically along the left end of the pachinko machine 1 when viewed from the front.

A unified lock unit 9 is provided inside the right edge of the inner frame assembly 7 (left edge in FIG. 2) as viewed from the front in FIG. Correspondingly, locking devices (not shown) are also provided on the right side edges (rear sides) of the integrated door unit 4 and the outer frame unit 2, respectively. As shown in FIG. 1, when the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 are closed with respect to the outer frame unit 2, the unified lock unit 9 on the back side locks the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly together with the lock. It disables the opening of 7.

A cylinder lock 6a with a keyhole is provided on the right edge of the tray unit 6. As shown in FIG. For example, when the manager of the game arcade inserts the special key into the keyhole and twists the cylinder lock 6a clockwise, the unified lock unit 9 is actuated and the integrated door unit 4 can be opened together with the inner frame assembly 7. . When all of these are opened from the outer frame unit 2 to the front side (moved like a door), the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is exposed on the front side.

On the other hand, when the cylinder lock 6a is twisted counterclockwise, only the integrated door unit 4 is unlocked while the inner frame assembly 7 remains locked, so that the integrated door unit 4 can be opened. When the integral door unit 4 is opened to the front side, the game board unit 8 is directly exposed, and in this state, the manager of the game parlor can remove obstacles such as clogged balls in the board surface. Further, when the integrated door unit 4 is opened, the tray unit 6 is also opened to the front side together.

Moreover, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with the game board unit 8 as a game unit. The game board unit 8 is supported by the inner frame assembly 7 behind (inside) the integrated door unit 4 . The game board unit 8 can be attached to and detached from the inner frame assembly 7 with the integrated door unit 4 opened to the front side, for example. The integrated door unit 4 has a vertically long circular window 4a formed in the center thereof, and a glass unit (no reference numeral) is mounted in the window 4a. The glass unit is, for example, a combination of two transparent plates (glass plates) cut to match the shape of the window 4a. The glass unit is attached to the rear side of the integrated door unit 4 via a fixture (not shown). A game area 8a (board surface) is formed on the front surface of the game board unit 8, and the game area 8a can be visually recognized by the player from the front side through the window 4a. When the integral door unit 4 is closed, a space is formed between the inner surface of the glass unit and the board surface to allow the game balls to flow down.

The receiving tray unit 6 has a shape projecting from the integrated door unit 4 to the front side as a whole, and an upper tray 6b is formed on the upper surface thereof. In the upper tray 6b, game balls lent to the player (rental balls) and game balls obtained by winning prizes (prize balls) can be stored. Further, the tray unit 6 is formed with a lower tray 6c below the upper tray 6b. In the lower tray 6c, the game balls put out while the upper tray 6b is full are stored. The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is a model connected to a CR unit, and the game balls borrowed by the player are sent from the payout device unit 172 on the back side separately from the prize balls to the receiving tray unit 6 (upper tray 6b or lower tray). Dispensed onto a plate 6c).

A lending operation unit 14 is provided on the upper surface of the tray unit 6, and a ball lending button 10 and a return button 12 are arranged in the lending operation unit 14. - 特許庁When the player operates the ball lending button 10 with a valuable medium (for example, a magnetic recording medium, a storage IC built-in medium, etc.) inserted into a CR unit (not shown), the number corresponding to a predetermined number of degrees (for example, 5 degrees) (For example, 125) game balls are rented. For this reason, a frequency display (not shown) is arranged on the upper surface of the lending operation unit 14, and the remaining frequency of the valuable medium inserted in the CR unit is displayed on this frequency display. By operating the return button 12, the player can receive the return of the valuable medium with remaining points. The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is exemplified by a model that is connected to the CR unit, but may be a model that is not connected to the CR unit.

Further, on the upper surface of the receiving tray unit 6, an upper tray ball removing button 6d is installed in front of the upper tray 6b, and a lower tray ball removing lever 6e is provided in the center before the lower tray 6c. is installed. The player can cause the game balls stored in the upper tray 6b to flow down to the lower tray 6c by, for example, pressing the upper tray ball removal button 6d. Further, the player can drop and eject the game balls stored in the lower tray 6c by sliding the lower tray ball extraction lever 6e leftward, for example. The ejected game balls are received, for example, in a ball receiving box (not shown).

A grip unit 16 is installed at the lower right portion of the tray unit 6 . The player operates the grip unit 16 to operate the shooting control board set 174 and can shoot (hit) a game ball toward the game area 8a (ball shooting device). The shot game ball rises from the lower edge of the game board unit 8 along the left edge, is guided by an outer band (not shown), and is thrown into the game area 8a. A large number of obstacle nails, windmills (no reference numerals in the figure), etc. are arranged in the game area 8a, and the thrown game ball flows down the game area 8a while being guided and guided by the obstacle nails and the windmills. The structure of the game area 8a (board surface) will be described later with reference to another drawing.

[Composition of the front of the frame]
The integrated door unit 4 is provided with a left top lens unit 47 and an upper right illumination unit 49 as components for presentation. Among them, the left top lens unit 47 incorporates a glass frame top lamp 46 and a left glass frame decoration lamp 48 , and the upper right illumination unit 49 incorporates a right glass frame decoration lamp 50 . In addition, left and right glass frame decoration lamps 52 are installed in the integral door unit 4 so as to be continuous below the left top lens unit 47 and the upper right illumination unit 49. These glass frame decoration lamps 52 are It extends from the left and right edges of the integrated door unit 4 to the front surface of the receiving tray unit 6 so as to wrap around. In the integrated door unit 4, the glass frame top lamp 46, the left and right glass frame decoration lamps 48, 50, 52, etc. are arranged so as to surround the glass unit (no reference numeral). The glass frame decoration lamp 52 includes a button lamp built in the push button 45a.

The various lamps 46, 48, 50, 52 described above perform effects by, for example, light emission from built-in LEDs (lighting, blinking, change in luminance gradation, change in color tone, etc.). Further, in the upper part of the integrated door unit 4, the left top lens unit 47 and the upper right illumination unit 49 are provided with glass frame top speakers 54 and 55, respectively. On the other hand, an outer frame speaker 56 is incorporated in the lower left position of the outer frame unit 2 . These speakers 54, 55, and 56 output sound effects, BGM, voices, etc. (general sound) to execute production.

[Operation member]
An operation unit 45 (an operation member) is installed in the center of the tray unit 6 so as to protrude from the upper tray 6b toward the upper front side. The operation unit 45 has a circular push button 45a arranged in the center thereof, and a bar-shaped lever member 45b arranged on the left side of the push button 45a. The operation unit 45 is capable of accepting operations in various scenes shown on the production. In one scene of the performance, the player presses the push button 45a, and in another scene, the player pulls the lever member 45b forward. By operating the operation unit 45 in various modes, the player can switch the contents of the effect (for example, the background screen displayed on the liquid crystal display 42), for example, while the symbols are fluctuating, the big win is being confirmed, or the big win is being displayed. During the game, it is possible to generate some kind of effects (announcement effects, variable probability promotion effects, promotion effects during big roles, etc.).

A ring-shaped portion 45c is provided around the push button 45a so as to surround the push button 45a. Unlike the push button 45a and the lever member 45b, the ring-shaped portion 45c is a member provided for decoration, and rotates counterclockwise in conjunction with the pull-in operation of the lever member 45b. Moreover, the ring-shaped portion 45c has a plurality of cells that are circumferentially divided at regular intervals. These cells cannot be operated by the player, but they are effectively used to inform the player of the operation method.

When the player is requested to perform some kind of operation, a reduced image representing the operation method of the operation unit 45 is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 . At this time, each cell of the ring-shaped portion 45c in the reduced image is expressed as if it were a lamp, in order to inform the player of the time during which the specified operation can be performed (effective operation time). be. More specifically, in the ring-shaped portion in the reduced image, all the cells are lit up when it becomes operable, and the cells are turned off one by one as the remaining time decreases. When the remaining time runs out, all the cells are turned off. The actual ring-shaped portion 45c does not have a light source and does not turn on/off like the ring-shaped portion shown in the reduced image displayed on the liquid crystal screen. By switching the lighting/lighting out of the part in this manner, the player can intuitively grasp the remaining time of the operation.

Furthermore, the push button 45a can protrude upward when a predetermined trigger occurs during the progress of the game. The push button 45a has a button lamp (light source) inside. The push button 45a normally emits light in a default color (for example, white or blue), but when the probability of winning is high, it may emit light in a color different from the default color (yellow or red), which makes it stand out. Sometimes it can glow even more colorfully. By projecting the push button 45a, the player can be made to recognize that the pushing operation of the button at the time of projection is particularly important.

In this embodiment, the push button 45a and the lever member 45b are mounted on the same operation unit 45, but the push button 45a and the lever member 45b may be provided as independent operation members. Moreover, these operating members may be arranged at close positions or may be arranged at distant positions.

A cross key button 44 is provided on the right side of the operation unit 45 . The cross key button 44 is composed of, for example, four push-type buttons. Specifically, the cross key button 44 includes an upper button arranged on the gaming machine side, a right button arranged on the right side, a lower button arranged on the player side, and a left button arranged on the left side as viewed from the player. made up of buttons. By pressing the cross key button 44, the player can set the game environment or input the player's personal data into the game machine. Also, the player can switch between ON and OFF of the auto button function by pressing the upper button of the cross key button 44 .

[Composition of the back side]
As shown in FIG. 2, the back side of the pachinko machine 1 includes a power control unit 162, a main control board unit 170, a payout device unit 172, a flow path unit 173, a launch control board set 174, and a payout control board unit 176. , back cover unit 178 and the like are installed. In addition, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, various electronic devices (including a control computer not shown) that constitute the power system and control system of the pachinko machine 1, an external terminal board 160, a power cord (power plug) 164, A ground wire (ground terminal) 166, connection wiring (not shown), and the like are installed. Electronic devices will be further described later based on another block diagram (FIG. 14).

The dispensing device unit 172 has, for example, a prize ball tank 172a and a prize ball case (no reference numerals). In this state, game balls replenished from a replenishment path (not shown) can be stored. The game balls stored in the prize ball tank 172a are led to the prize ball case through an upper prize ball gutter (not shown). The flow path unit 173 guides the game balls delivered from the payout device unit 172 toward the tray unit 6 on the front side.

The external terminal board 160 is for connecting the pachinko machine 1 to an external electronic device (for example, a data display device, a hall computer, etc.). Various external information signals (e.g. prize ball information, door opening information, pattern confirmation number information, jackpot information, start opening information, etc.) representing the progress state, maintenance state, etc. are output to external electronic devices. ing.

The power cord 164 secures the power supply (electric power) necessary for the pachinko machine 1 to operate, for example, by being connected to a power supply (for example, AC 24V) installed in an island facility of the game arcade. The ground wire 166 is also connected to a ground terminal installed in the island equipment to secure the grounding of the pachinko machine 1 .

[Board composition]
FIG. 3 is a front view showing the game board unit 8 alone. In the game area 8a, a relatively large production unit 40 is arranged at its central position. Second area, right-handed area) and the lower part. In addition, in the game area 8a, around the production unit 40, there are a start device 400, a starting gate 20, normal winning ports 22, 25, a variable starting winning device 28, a first variable winning device 30, a second variable winning device 31, and the like. are distributed and installed. Among them, the start device 400 is positioned at the lower center of the left portion of the game area 8a. Details of the start device 400 will be described later. In the right part of the game area 8a, the starting gate 20, the normal winning opening 25, the variable starting winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, and the second variable winning device 31 are arranged in this order from the top.

The game ball thrown into the game area 8a passes through the starting gate 20, enters the start device 400, enters (wins) the normal winning holes 22, 25, or , the variable starting winning device 28 during the opening operation, the first variable winning device 30 during the opening operation, and the second variable winning device 31 during the opening operation. Here, a game ball flowing down the left side area of the game area 8a may enter the starting device 400 or the normal winning opening 22 . A game ball flowing down the right side area of the game area 8a passes through the starting gate 20, enters the normal winning hole 25, enters the variable starting winning device 28 during the opening operation, or enters the variable starting winning device 28 during the opening operation. There is a possibility that a ball may land in the first variable prize winning device 30 or may land in the second variable prize winning device 31 during opening operation.

In the present embodiment, the variable starting prize winning device 28 operates when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied (when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a win mode), and accordingly the entry into the right starting prize opening 28b. Enables balls (usually motorized accessories). The variable start-up winning device 28 has, for example, a pair of left and right opening/closing members 28a, and these opening/closing members 28a reciprocate in the left-right direction along the board surface by the action of a link mechanism using, for example, a solenoid (not shown). That is, as shown in FIG. 3, the left and right opening/closing members 28a are in the closed position with their tips facing upward, and at this time, it is difficult to enter the ball into the right start winning hole 28b (a game ball is difficult to enter). There is no gap that can be made). On the other hand, when the variable starting prize winning device 28 operates, the left and right opening/closing members 28a are displaced (expanded) from the closed position toward the open position, and the width of the opening is expanded left and right to open the right starting prize winning port 28b. During this time, the variable starting prize winning device 28 is in a state in which the game ball can enter, and can cause the ball to enter the right starting prize winning port 28b (variable starting prize winning means). In addition, at this time, the opening/closing member 28a also functions as a member for guiding the entry of the game ball into the right start winning opening 28b. In addition, the arrangement of the obstructing nails installed in the game board unit 8 basically does not impede the downflow of the game balls toward the variable starting prize winning device 28 (the right starting winning port 28b when opened). However, the game ball does not necessarily enter the variable starting prize winning device 28 (right starting prize winning port 28b) at the time of opening operation, and the ball enters at random.

In addition, the variable start winning device 28 is a condition that is difficult to be satisfied in a non-time shortening state (predetermined game state), and a predetermined condition that is more likely to be satisfied in a time shortening state (advantageous game state) than in a non-time shortening state. When the operation condition (the condition that the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in the winning mode and the normal electric accessory is opened for a long time) is not satisfied, it is difficult to enter the game ball into the right start winning opening 28b. On the other hand, when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied, the state is shifted to an easy-to-enter state in which it is easier to enter the game ball into the right start winning opening 28b than the difficult-to-enter state. The variable start winning device 28 short-opens (opens for 0.1 second) when the normal symbols are stopped and displayed in the winning mode in the non-time shortening state, and stops and displays the normal symbols in the winning mode in the time shortening state. If so, long open (open for 1.0 to 6.0 seconds).

The first variable winning device 30 operates when a prescribed condition is satisfied (when a special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of a big win, or when a game ball passes through a specific area during a small win game). , to allow the ball to enter the first big prize-winning hole 30b (special electric accessory, first special ball-entering event generation means).

The first variable prize winning device 30 (attacker) is a device arranged under the variable starting prize winning device 28 and has one opening/closing member 30a. The opening/closing member 30a is opened/closed by reciprocating back and forth with respect to the board surface by the action of a link mechanism using, for example, a solenoid (not shown). As shown in the drawing, the opening/closing member 30a is in the closed position (closed state) along the board surface, and at this time, it is difficult for the ball to enter the first big winning hole 30b. When the first variable prize winning device 30 is activated, the opening/closing member 30a is displaced forward with its lower edge portion as a hinge to open the first big prize winning port 30b (open state). During this time, the first variable prize winning device 30 is in a state in which game balls can flow in, and the phenomenon of winning to the first big prize winning port 30b can be generated. At this time, the opening/closing member 30a also functions as a member that guides the inflow of game balls into the first big winning hole 30b.

The second variable winning device 31 operates when a predetermined condition is satisfied (when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of a small win), and enables the ball to enter the second big winning hole 31b ( Special electric accessory, second special winning event generating means). Incidentally, the second variable winning device 31 may operate when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of a big win.

The second variable winning device 31 is a device arranged on the right side of the effect unit 40, and has one opening/closing member 31a, for example. The second variable winning device 31 employs a type of device in which the opening/closing member 31a slides inside the board surface (sliding attacker). The opening/closing member 31a reciprocates in the front-rear direction with respect to the board surface, for example, by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown). The opening/closing member 31a is in the closed position (closed state) in a state of protruding from the board surface toward the player side. is difficult to enter (the second big winning hole 31b is closed). Then, when the second variable prize winning device 31 operates, the opening/closing member 31a is pulled into the inside of the board to open the second big prize winning port 31b (open state). During this time, the second variable winning device 31 is in a state in which it is not difficult for game balls to flow in, and an event of a ball entering the second big winning hole 31b can be generated.

[Specific area]
Further, inside the second variable winning device 31, a specific area 31x is provided. The specific area 31x is an area where it is difficult for game balls to pass when the second variable winning device 31 is in a closed state, and when the second variable winning device 31 is in an open state, the specific region slide member 31c is This is an area through which a game ball can pass when it is drawn into the inside of the board surface. Details of the second variable winning device 31 will be described later.

Also, although not shown, the second variable winning device 31 (opening/closing member 31a) may be formed with a game ball rolling speed reduction section that reduces the rolling speed of the game ball. The game ball rolling speed reduction portion is formed by making the inclination of the opening/closing member 31a gentle, or by forming protrusions protruding alternately at positions on the opening/closing member 31a through which the game ball passes so that the game ball advances in a zigzag manner. can be realized. As a result, many game balls can enter the second variable winning device 31 during the small winning game.

In addition, an out port 32 is formed inside the starting device 400 , and game balls that do not enter various winning ports are finally recovered to the back side of the game board unit 8 through the out port 32 . In addition, each starting prize winning port of the starting device 400, normal winning prize ports 22, 25, variable starting prize winning device 28 (right starting prize winning port 28b), first variable prize winning device 30 (first big prize winning port 30b), second variable prize winning device All the game balls hit into the game area 8a including the game balls entering the device 31 (the second big winning hole 31b, specific area) are collected to the back side of the game board unit 8. The collected game balls are discharged out of the frame from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 through an out passage assembly (not shown), and join the replenishment route of the island facility (not shown).

4 and 5 are diagrams showing the details of the second variable winning device 31. FIG.
The second variable winning device 31 has a second big winning opening 31b arranged below a sliding opening/closing member 31a. The inside of the second big prize winning opening 31b is inclined downward to the left, and a passage extends downward at the left end. A second count switch 85 is arranged in the downwardly extending passage, and the second count switch 85 counts the number of game balls entering the second variable winning device 31 .

Then, the passage extending downward is divided into two routes at the tip. One first passage 31d extends downward toward the specific region 31x, and the other second passage 31e extends downward toward the discharge hole 31y.
A specific region slide member 31c is arranged in the first passage 31d, and a specific region 31x is arranged downstream of the first passage 31d. A specific area switch (not shown) is arranged inside the specific area 31x.
On the other hand, no special member is arranged in the second passage 31e, and a discharge hole 31y is arranged downstream of the second passage 31e.

The specific area slide member 31c operates when a special condition is satisfied (after the first time has elapsed and before the second time has elapsed since the operation of the second variable winning device 31), and the specific area 31x is operated. To allow passage of game balls. The specific area slide member 31c slides along the front-rear direction of the board surface by the action of a link mechanism using a specific area solenoid (not shown), for example. For example, after the first time has passed, 0.2 seconds have passed since the second variable winning device 31 was activated, and after the second time has passed, 1.8 seconds have passed since the second variable winning device 31 has been activated. After the passage of time.

When the specific area solenoid is in the OFF state, the specific area slide member 31c blocks the first passage 31d, making it difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area 31x. On the other hand, when the specific area solenoid is turned on, the specific area slide member 31c is pulled inside the board surface, so that the game ball can easily pass through the specific area 31x.

Next, the operation of the second variable winning device 31 will be described.
As shown in FIG. 4A, the sliding opening/closing member 31a is drawn into the inside of the board surface, and the game ball enters the second big winning hole 31b. In the illustrated example, four game balls are advancing toward the second big winning hole 31b. Here, the first game ball is detected by the second count switch 85 .

As shown in FIG. 4B, the first game ball has reached the specific area slide member 31c. The second and third game balls are advancing toward the second count switch 85. - 特許庁The fourth game ball is about to enter the second big winning hole 31b.

As shown in FIG. 4(C), at this time point, the specific area slide member 31c is not pulled inward (because it is not in operation), so the first game ball is the specific area slide. The direction of travel is changed to the right by the member 31c to head toward the second passage 31e. In this case, the first game ball is collected by the discharge hole 31y.

As shown in (D) in FIG. 5, it is assumed that the specific-area slide member 31c is drawn inside the board surface at this time (during operation). In this case, the second game ball passes through the front side of the specific area slide member 31c and proceeds to the first passage 31d. Then, the second game ball passes through the specific area 31x and is detected by the specific area switch.

As shown in FIG. 5(E), the third game ball also passes through the front side of the specific area slide member 31c and advances to the first passage 31d. In this case, the third game ball passes through the specific area 31x and is detected by the specific area switch.

As shown in (F) in FIG. 5, at this point, the operation of the specific area slide member 31c is completed, and the specific area slide member 31c protrudes forward from the board surface. In this case, the fourth game ball is guided to the right by the specific area slide member 31c and proceeds to the second passage 31e. And the fourth game ball is collected by the discharge hole 31y.

6 to 12 are diagrams showing the details of the starting device 400. FIG.
6 is a perspective view of the starting device 400. FIG.
As shown in FIG. 6, the starting device 400 includes a base member 410, a cover member 420, a ball entrance 430, a right movable device 480, a left movable device 490, and the like.

The base member 410 is a base member of the start device 400, and is attached to the game board unit 8 with fastening members such as screws.
The cover member 420 is a member attached to the front side of the base member 410, and various start winning openings and out openings are arranged therein.

The ball entrance 430 is arranged in the upper center of the cover member 420 and is an entrance for the game ball to enter the start device 400 .

The right moving device 480 is attached to the rear right side of the base member 410 and is a device for moving the right wing member 438 (see FIG. 7) of the starting device 400 .

The left moving device 490 is attached to the rear left side of the base member 410 and is a device for moving the left blade member 442 (see FIG. 7) of the starting device 400 .

7 and 8 are diagrams showing the internal structure of the starting device 400. FIG.
Here, FIG. 7 shows a state in which the blade members (right blade member 438 and left blade member 442) of the start device 400 are closed, and FIG. 8 shows a state in which the blade members of the start device 400 are open. state.

As shown in FIG. 7, below the ball entrance 430 is formed a guide passage 432 inclined downward and to the right.
A one-hole cloon member 434 is arranged at the lower right of the guide passage 432 . The croon member 434 is a mortar-shaped member having a large opening on the upper side, and an opening through which one game ball can pass is formed on the bottom surface.
Below the crew member 434, a guide passage 436 is formed which is inclined in the lower left direction.

A right blade member 438 is arranged at the lower left of the guide passage 436 .
A guide passage 440 inclined in the lower left direction is formed at the lower left of the right blade member 438 .
A left blade member 442 is arranged at the lower left of the guide passage 440 .
A guide passage 444 inclined in the lower left direction is formed at the lower left of the left blade member 442 .

The right wing member 438 and the left wing member 442 are movable bodies.
In addition, the right blade member 438 and the left blade member 442 are arranged above (upstream) the starting device right starting winning port 450 and the starting device middle starting winning port 452, and the game ball is placed in the starting device right starting winning port 450 or the starting device It is a member that affects whether or not the ball enters (whether or not it passes) the middle start winning opening 452 .

When the solenoid for operating the right blade member 438 is ON, the right blade member 438 rises upward and shifts to an open state, leading the game ball to the starting device right start winning opening 450 . On the other hand, when the solenoid that operates the right blade member 438 is OFF, the right blade member 438 maintains the closed state without rising, and the game ball passes through the upper part of the right blade member 438 and enters the guide passage 440. be guided.

In addition, when the solenoid for operating the left blade member 442 is ON, the left blade member 442 rises upward and shifts to an open state, leading the game ball to the starting winning opening 452 in the starting device. On the other hand, when the solenoid that operates the left blade member 442 is OFF, the left blade member 442 maintains the closed state without rising, and the game ball passes through the upper part of the left blade member 442 and enters the guide passage 444. be guided.

The right wing member 438 and the left wing member 442 move along the guide groove in which the movable pin is arranged at the rear by pushing up the movable pin inserted near the center of the member, and rotates to the left. It rotates about its axis and transitions to the open state (see FIG. 8).

Below the right wing member 438, a starting device right start winning opening 450 is arranged. The starting device right start winning opening 450 is an opportunity generation area in which a game ball entered into the entrance 430 can enter (pass through) and a lottery opportunity (predetermined opportunity) for the first special symbol lottery can be generated. is.

Below the left blade member 442, a starting winning opening 452 in the starting device is arranged. The starting prize winning opening 452 in the starting device is an opportunity generation area in which a game ball entering the entrance 430 can be entered (passed) and a lottery opportunity (predetermined opportunity) for the first special symbol lottery can be generated. is.

At the lower left of the guide passage 444, a starting device left starting winning port 454 is arranged. The starting device left start winning opening 454 is an opportunity generation area in which a game ball entering the entrance 430 can enter (pass through) and a lottery opportunity (predetermined opportunity) of a normal symbol lottery can be generated. .

A guide passage 462 inclined in the lower right direction is formed on the right side of the starting device right starting prize opening 450 .
An out port 32 is arranged at the lower right of the guide passage 462 . A guide passage 460 slanted downward to the left is formed on the right side of the out port 32 .

A guide passage 464 slanted downward to the left is formed on the left side of the starting device right start winning opening 450 .
An out port 32 is arranged at the lower left of the guide passage 464 .

A guide passage 466 inclined in the lower right direction is formed on the right side of the start winning opening 452 in the starting device.
A guide passage 468 inclined in the lower left direction is formed on the left side of the start winning opening 452 in the starting device.
An out port 32 is arranged at the lower left of the guide passage 468 .

A guide passage 470 inclined downward and to the right is formed on the right side of the starting device left start winning opening 454 .
A guide passage 472 inclined in the lower left direction is formed on the left side of the starting device left start winning opening 454 .
An out port 32 is arranged at the lower left of the guide passage 472 . A guide passage 474 slanted downward and to the right is formed on the left side of the out port 32 .

Below the starting device right starting winning port 450 , the starting device middle starting winning port 452 and the starting device left starting winning port 454 , a starting device illumination board 476 is arranged.
Three lamps (LED) 478 are arranged on the starting device illumination board 476, and when a game ball enters each start winning opening, the corresponding lamp lights up.

Next, the flow of game balls inside the starting device 400 will be described.
As shown in FIG. 9 , a game ball entered into the ball entrance 430 is guided to the right wing member 438 via the crew member 434 .
Then, when the right wing member 438 and the left wing member 442 are closed, the game ball passes over the right wing member 438 and the left wing member 442 and finally reaches the starting device left start winning opening 454 enter the ball.

Since the starting device left start winning opening switch is arranged in the starting device left starting winning opening 454, entry of the game ball is detected by the starting device left starting winning opening switch.

On the other hand, when the right wing member 438 or the left wing member 442 is open, the flow of the game ball is the same as when the right wing member 438 or the left wing member 442 is closed.
That is, as shown in FIG. 10, the game ball entering the ball entrance 430 is led to the right wing member 438 via the crew member 434 .

Then, when the right wing member 438 or the left wing member 442 is open, the game ball falls at the position of the right wing member 438 or the left wing member 442, and finally, the starting device right start winning opening 450 Alternatively, the ball enters the starting winning opening 452 in the starting device.

Since the starting device right start winning opening switch is arranged in the starting device right starting winning opening 450, entry of the game ball is detected by the starting device right starting winning opening switch.
In addition, since the starting device start winning opening switch is arranged in the starting device starting winning opening 452, entry of the game ball is detected by the starting device starting winning opening switch.

Here, when a game ball enters the ball entrance 430 of the starting device 400, it must enter any one of the starting device right starting winning port 450, the starting device middle starting winning port 452, and the starting device left starting winning port 454. However, the ball may enter the out hole 32 in some cases. In addition, not only game balls that enter the ball entrance 430 of the start device 400 but also game balls that do not enter the ball entrance 430 of the start device 400 enter the out port 32 from the side surface side. There is also
Although the right wing member 438 and the left wing member 442 have been described as moving to the open state at the same time, it is also possible not to move them to the open state at the same time.

11 and 12 are side views of the starting device 400. FIG.
Here, FIG. 11 shows the wing member (eg, right wing member 438 in FIG. 10) closed, and FIG. 12 shows the wing member open.

As described above, the right moving device 480 is attached to the rear right side of the base member 410 and is a device for moving the right wing member 438 of the starting device 400 .

The right movable device 480 also includes a starter right solenoid 481, a coil member 482, a flapper member 483, an arm member 484, a hook member 485, a spring member 486, and the like. Note that the hook member 485 may be configured as a part of the arm member 484 (the hook member 485 and the arm member 484 may be the same component).

When the starting device right solenoid 481 is energized by the main controller, the coil member 482 is energized and the plate-like flapper member 483 is attracted to the coil member 482 .
The flapper member 483 and the arm member 484 are connected, and when the flapper member 483 moves upward, the arm member 484 also moves upward. An arc-shaped hook member 485 is connected to the tip of the arm member 484 . Therefore, the hook member 485 also moves upward as the flapper member 483 and the arm member 484 move (see FIG. 12).

When the hook member 485 moves upward, the hook member 485 pushes up the movable pin 487 inserted in the right blade member 438, and the right blade member 438 shifts from the closed state to the open state (see FIG. 10). In this case, the coil member 482 and the flapper member 483 are prevented from coming into contact with each other by stoppers (not shown) (see FIG. 12).

Further, when the starting device right solenoid 481 is not energized, the spring member 486 (or the weight of the spring member 486 and the flapper member 483) causes the flapper member 483 to be positioned away from the coil member 482. (see FIG. 11).
Although the right movable device 480 has been described here, the left movable device 490 also has the same configuration.

[Features of the start device]
There are many prior arts that relate to a winning device unit that is provided with an opening and closing member to limit winning to a specific winning area. There is no configuration in which the opening/closing member continues to open/close from the time the power is turned on and the opening/closing operation stabilizes the starting winning rate.

The starting device 400 sorts the game balls entered into the ball entrance 430 into a special symbol start winning opening and a normal symbol starting winning opening (winning opening, operation opening), thereby "randomly varying various patterns." have the function of

Details of the flow of game balls in the starting device 400 will be described below.
(1) A ball entry hole 430 is provided in the upper part of the starting device 400, and a game ball entering from there is directed to a one-hole cloon member 434 and discharged from the cloon member 434 for an irregular time. give. As a result, it is possible to avoid thuds due to vibrations such as thuds. It is also possible to attach a vibration sensor, a magnet sensor, and a radio wave sensor to the starting device 400 to strengthen countermeasures against various problems. The croon member 434 is attached to the start device 400 with some play, and the play can absorb an external impact (such as a thud), thereby avoiding the influence of vibration.

(2) The game ball ejected from the crew member 434 is guided to a slope-shaped guide passage, and the opening and closing states of the right blade member 438 and the left blade member 442, which are always constantly opened and closed, are arranged in the guide passage. The sphere path changes as follows.

(a) When the right wing member 438 or the left wing member 442 is open, the game ball falls from the slope and heads for the start winning opening of the special symbol held below.
(b) When right wing member 438 or left wing member 442 is closed, the game ball passes over right wing member 438 or left wing member 442 . In addition, the start device 400 is provided with two wing members, thereby giving two chances of winning the starting winning opening of the special symbol.

(3) The game ball not picked up by the right wing member 438 or the left wing member 442 finally goes to the starting winning opening of the normal design (normal design working opening where the normal design fluctuates).

In addition, the starting device 400 also has the following features.
Out ports are arranged on the left and right of the special symbol start winning opening and the normal symbol starting winning opening, and the out opening at the bottom of the board in general models is deleted.
Since the right wing member 438 and the left wing member 442 are always movable, the actuator of the starting device 400 is equipped with a flapper type solenoid instead of the generally used push-pull type solenoid to prevent deterioration due to wear. prevent.

In addition, since the player has to keep track of how the game balls entering the starting device 400 are sorted, in order to notify this visually in an easy-to-understand manner, a start winning opening with a special pattern is provided. And a lamp (LED) is arranged at the bottom of the start winning opening of the normal pattern, and has a function to light up at the winning timing.

By adopting the starting device 400 having such a configuration, the following effects can be exhibited.
(1) By installing the croon member 434, irregularity is given to the timing when the game ball entering the starting device 400 moves toward the right wing member 438 or the left wing member 442 that opens and closes, and the player The movement of the game ball increases the sense of exhilaration, and the game ball is shot in time with the opening timing of the right wing member 438 or the left wing member 442.

(2) By mounting the out port on the start device 400, the region of the out port arranged at the bottom of the board surface can be assigned to the start device 400, and the start device 400 and the out port are integrated to achieve compactness. is possible, and effective utilization of the lower part of the board surface becomes possible.

(3) By adopting a flapper type solenoid, it is possible to prevent abrasion of the solenoid itself and ensure durability that can withstand constant movement.

(4) By arranging a lamp (LED) at the lower part of the starting prize opening of the special pattern and the starting prize opening of the normal pattern and lighting it at the winning timing, the winning can be effectively notified to the player.

FIG. 13 is a front view showing an enlarged part of the game board unit 8 (lower left position in the window 4a).
In the game board unit 8, for example, a normal symbol display device 33 (normal symbol display means) and a normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a are provided at the lower right position in the window 4a, and a first special symbol display device 34 (second 1 symbol display means), a second special symbol display device 35 (second symbol display means), a first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, a second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a and a game state display device 38 are provided.

Of these, the normal design display device 33 alternately lights, for example, three lamps (LEDs) to variably display the normal design, and stops displaying the normal design by lighting or extinguishing the lamp. The normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a displays the number of memories of 0 to 4 by a combination of extinguishing, lighting, and blinking of two lamps (LED), for example. For example, in the display mode in which both lamps are turned off, the stored number is displayed as 0, in the display mode in which one lamp is lit, the stored number is displayed as 1, and in the display mode where the same one lamp is blinked. The number of memories is displayed as 2, the number of memories is 3 in the display mode in which one lamp is blinking and the other lamp is lit, and the number of memories is 4 in the display mode in which both lamps are blinking. For example, to display an individual. Although two lamps (LED) are used here, four lamps (LED) may be used to form the normal symbol working memory lamp 33a. In this case, the number of working memories can be displayed by the number of lamps that are lit.

Each time a game ball passes through the start gate 20 or enters the starting device left start winning opening 454, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a passes to trigger an operation lottery. In the sense of memorizing that, it changes to the display mode after increasing one by one (up to 4), and the display mode after decreasing by one each time the fluctuation of the normal pattern is started with the passage as a trigger. changing to In this embodiment, when the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a is not lit (the number of memories is 0), the game ball passes through the starting gate 20 in a state where the normal symbol can already start to fluctuate (at the time of stop display). However, the display mode does not change. That is, the number of memories (up to 4) represented by the display mode of the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a represents the number of passages in which the normal symbol variation has not yet started at that time.

In addition, the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35 can display the fluctuation state and the stop state of the special symbols by, for example, a 7-segment LED (with dots) (symbol display means, first pattern display means, second pattern display means). In addition, the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35 may have a form in which a plurality of dot LEDs are arranged geometrically (for example, circularly).

In addition, the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a and the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a are, for example, two lamps (LED) extinguished or lit, depending on the display mode composed of a combination of blinking, each 0 to 4 (memory number display means). For example, in a display mode in which both lamps are turned off, the stored number is displayed as 0, in a display mode in which one lamp is lit, a stored number is displayed as 1, and in a display mode in which the same one lamp is blinking. The number of memories is displayed as 2, the number of memories is displayed as 3 in a display mode in which one lamp is blinking and the other lamp is lit, and the number of memories is displayed in a display mode in which both lamps are blinking. 4 are displayed, and so on.

The first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a increases by one in the sense of memorizing that a ball has entered each time a game ball enters the starting device right starting winning port 450 or the starting device middle starting winning port 452. It changes to a later display mode (up to 4), and changes to a display mode after decreasing one by one each time the variation of the special symbol is started with the entry ball as a trigger. In addition, the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a is stored one by one in the sense that each time a game ball enters the variable starting prize winning device 28 (right starting prize winning port 28b), it memorizes that a ball has entered. It changes to the display mode after the increase (up to 4), and changes to the display mode after the decrease one by one whenever the variation of the special symbol is started with the entry ball as a trigger. In addition, in the present embodiment, when the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a is not lit (the number of memories is 0), the first special symbol (first symbol) is already in a state where variation can be started (at the time of stop display). , The display mode does not change even if the game ball enters the starting device right starting winning port 450 or the starting device middle starting winning port 452 . In addition, when the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a is not lit (the number of memories is 0), the second special symbol (second symbol) is already in a state where variation can be started (at the time of stop display), and the variable start winning device 28 (right starting winning opening 28b), the display mode does not change even if the game ball enters. That is, the number of memories (maximum 4) represented by the display mode of each special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, 35a is the number of entering balls whose variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol has not yet started at that time. represents the number of times

In addition, the gaming state display device 38 includes, for example, six LEDs respectively corresponding to the jackpot type display lamps 38a, 38b, 38c, the time saving state display lamp 38e, and the firing position designation display lamp 38f. In addition, in this embodiment, the normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, the first special symbol display device 34, the second special symbol display device 35, the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, the second special The symbol operation memory lamp 35a and the game state display device 38 are mounted on one integrated display board 89 and attached to the game board unit 8. - 特許庁

[Other configurations of the game board: see Fig. 3]
The effect unit 40 has an upper edge portion 40a that functions as a guide member for changing the flowing direction of the game ball, and has various decorative parts 40b and 40c inside. The decorative parts 40b and 40c enhance the decorativeness of the game board unit 8 by their three-dimensional shape, and can perform dramatic actions by emitting transmitted light from, for example, built-in light emitters (LEDs, etc.). . In addition, a liquid crystal display 42 (image display) is installed in the inner upper part of the production unit 40, and the production pattern (main pattern) corresponding to the special pattern and the fourth pattern are displayed on the liquid crystal display 42. At first, various effect images are displayed. Thus, the game board unit 8 impresses the player with the features of the pachinko machine 1 based on the configuration of the board surface (the design of the cell board not shown) and the decorativeness of the effect unit 40 .

A ball guide passage 40d is formed on the left side edge of the effect unit 40. As shown in FIG. The ball guide passage 40d passes through the back side of the production unit 40 and is connected to the lower rolling stage 40e. The ball guide passage 40d is opened diagonally upward to the left in the game area 8a, and when a game ball flowing down in the game area 8a randomly flows into the ball guide passage 40d, it passes through the interior and rolls. It is released onto the stage 40e. The upper surface of the rolling stage 40e has a smooth curved surface, on which the game ball can freely roll in the horizontal direction. The game ball rolling on the rolling stage 40e eventually flows down into the lower game area 8a. A ball discharge path 40k is formed at the center position of the rolling stage 40e, and the game ball guided to the ball discharge path 40k from the rolling stage 40e flows into the ball inlet 430 of the starting device 400 directly below. easier to do.

In addition, inside the upper center of the production unit 40, a drive source (for example, a motor, a solenoid, etc.) (not shown) is attached together with a movable body 40f for production (for example, a heart-shaped ornament). The rendering movable body 40f can execute rendering involving the action of a tangible object, in addition to the rendering using an image by the liquid crystal display 42 and the rendering by the light emitting device. Such an effect using the movable body 40f can exert appealing power different from the effect using a two-dimensional image.

A 7-segment display device 200 is arranged below the liquid crystal display 42 . Three 7-segment LEDs are arranged in the 7-segment display device 200 . The 7-segment display device 200 variably displays 7-segment performance symbols during variation of the special symbols, or displays performance during the big win game.

Furthermore, a storage display device 300 is arranged at the lower right of the 7-segment display device 200 . The memory display device 300 can execute an effect related to memory by emitting light (turning on, turning off, etc.) of the built-in LED.

The memory display device 300 is provided with a first special symbol memory display area M1, a second special symbol memory display area M2, the memory display area X1, and an effect display area X2.
Four white LEDs are arranged in the first special symbol memory display area M1, and the number of lighting of the LEDs corresponds to the memory number of the first special symbol (the number of display of the first special symbol working memory lamp 34a). there is
Four white LEDs are arranged in the second special symbol memory display area M2, and the number of lighting of the LEDs corresponds to the memory number of the second special symbol (the number of display of the second special symbol working memory lamp 35a). there is

One full-color LED is arranged in the storage display area X1, and when the LED is lit, it indicates that the special symbol is changing.
One or a plurality of full-color LEDs are arranged in the effect display area X2, and the lighting color of the LEDs indicates that the expectation of winning the special symbol lottery increases. Since the effect display area X2 lights up in the same color as the color of the internally drawn LED (reserved color), it is possible to give an easy-to-understand notification to the player.

When executing the memory color change effect, the lighting color of the target LED is originally changed, but in this embodiment, the first special symbol storage display area M1 and the second special symbol storage display area M2 are displayed in white. LEDs are placed. Therefore, in the first special symbol storage/display area M1 and the second special symbol storage/display area M2, the color change effect cannot be executed. Therefore, when executing the stored color change effect, the color change effect is replaced by changing the lighting color of the effect display area X2. However, in this case, it is difficult to know which memory is the target, so it is preferable to blink the target LED.
In addition, full-color LEDs may be arranged in the first special symbol storage/display area M1 and the second special symbol storage/display area M2 to execute the color change effect.

[Control configuration]
Next, a configuration related to control of the pachinko machine 1 will be described. FIG. 14 is a block diagram showing various electronic devices installed in the pachinko machine 1. As shown in FIG. The pachinko machine 1 is provided with a main control device 70 (main control computer) that serves as the center of the control operation, and this main control device 70 mainly has a function of controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko machine 1. there is The main controller 70 is incorporated in the main control board unit 170 described above.

In addition, the main control unit 70 is equipped with a circuit board (main control board) on which a main control CPU 72, which is a central processing unit, is mounted. RWM) 76 or the like is integrated as an LSI. The main controller 70 is also equipped with a random number generator 75 and a sampling circuit 77 . Of these, the random number generator 75 is for generating a hardware random number (for example, 0 to 65535 in decimal notation) for judging the jackpot of the special symbol lottery or the winning judgment of the normal symbol lottery. is input to the main control CPU 72 through the sampling circuit 77 . In addition, the main controller 70 is equipped with peripheral ICs such as an input/output (I/O) port 79, a clock generation circuit (not shown), a counter/timer circuit (CTC), and the like. Mounted on the board. A signal transmission path, a power supply path, a control bus, and the like are formed as wiring patterns on the circuit board (or an inner layer portion).

The starting gate 20 described above is integrally provided with a gate switch 78 for detecting passage of a game ball. In addition, the starting device left starting winning port 454 is provided with a starting device left starting winning port switch 78a for detecting the entry of a game ball.
In addition, the game board unit 8 includes a starting device inside start winning port 452, a starting device right starting winning port 450, a variable starting winning device 28, a first variable winning device 30 and a second variable winning device 31, respectively. A device inside start winning port switch 80, a starting device right starting winning port switch 81, a right starting winning port switch 82, a first count switch 84 and a second count switch 85 are provided.
Start device middle start prize mouth switch 80, start device right start prize mouth switch 81, right start prize mouth switch 82 are respectively for start device middle start prize mouth 452, start device middle start prize mouth 452, variable start prize mouth device 28 (right It is for detecting the winning of a game ball to the start winning opening 28b). The first count switch 84 is for detecting the winning of game balls into the first variable winning device 30 (the first big winning opening 30b) and counting the number. Further, the second count switch 85 is for detecting the winning of game balls to the second variable winning device 31 (second big winning opening 31b) and counting the number.

In addition, a specific area switch 83 is provided corresponding to the specific area 31x. A specific area switch 83 is provided at a position corresponding to the specific area 31x inside the second big winning hole 31b, and the specific area switch 83 detects that the game ball has passed through the specific area 31x.

Similarly, the game board unit 8 is equipped with a winning opening switch 86 for detecting the winning of game balls into the normal winning openings 22 and 25 . Here, a configuration using a common winning opening switch 86 for all the normal winning openings 22 and 25 is taken as an example, but for example, separate winning opening switches 86 are installed on the left and right sides of the board, and the winning opening on the left side A switch 86 detects winning of a game ball to the normal winning ports 22 and 25 positioned on the left side of the board, and a right winning port switch 86 detects winning of a game ball to the normal winning port 25 positioned on the right side of the board. may be

In any case, winning detection signals and passing detection signals of these switches are input to the main control CPU 72 via an input/output driver (not shown). In addition, due to the configuration of the game board unit 8, in this embodiment, the gate switch 78, the start device left start winning opening switch 78a, the specific area switch 83, the first count switch 84, the second counting switch 85, and the winning opening switch 86 The winning detection signal and the passing detection signal are transmitted via the panel relay terminal board 87, and the panel relay terminal board 87 is provided with wiring patterns, connection terminals, etc. for relaying the respective winning detection signals. .

The above-described normal symbol display device 33, normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, first special symbol display device 34, second special symbol display device 35, first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a and game The display operation of the status display device 38 is controlled based on a control signal from the main control CPU 72 . The main control CPU 72 outputs control signals to these display devices 33, 34, 35, 38 and lamps 33a, 34a, 35a according to the progress of the game, and controls the lighting state of each LED. Further, these display devices 33, 34, 35, 38 and lamps 33a, 34a, 35a are installed in the game board unit 8 in a state of being mounted on one integrated display board 89 as described above. A control signal is transmitted from the main control CPU 72 to the display substrate 89 via the panel relay terminal board 87 .

In addition, the game board unit 8 includes a normal electric accessory solenoid 88 and a first large winning opening solenoid corresponding to the variable starting winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, the second variable winning device 31 and the specific area 31x, respectively. 90, a second big winning opening solenoid 97 and a specific area solenoid 99 are provided. These solenoids 88, 90, 97 and 99 are operated (excited) based on control signals from the main control CPU 72, and the variable starting prize winning device 28, the first variable prize winning device 30, the second variable prize winning device 31 and the specific area 31x, respectively. open and close the Control signals for these solenoids 88 , 90 , 97 and 99 are also transmitted from the main control CPU 72 via the panel relay terminal plate 87 .

In addition, a glass frame open switch 91 is installed in the integrated door unit 4 and a plastic frame open switch 93 is installed in the inner frame assembly 7 . When the integrated door unit 4 is opened alone, a contact signal from the glass frame opening switch 91 is input to the main controller 70 (main control CPU 72), and the inner frame assembly 7 is opened from the outer frame unit 2. Then, a contact signal from the plastic frame opening switch 93 is input to the main controller 70 (main control CPU 72). The main control CPU 72 can detect the open state of the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 from these contact signals. When detecting the open state of the integrated door unit 4 or the inner frame assembly 7, the main control CPU 72 generates a door open information signal as the external information signal.

A payout control device 92 is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 (special privilege providing means). This payout control device 92 (payout control computer) controls the operation of the payout device unit 172 described above. The payout control device 92 is equipped with a circuit board (payout control board) on which a payout control CPU 94 is mounted, and this payout control CPU 94 is also an LSI integrated with a CPU core (not shown) and semiconductor memories such as a ROM 96 and a RAM 98. It is configured. The payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94) controls the operation of the payout device unit 172 based on the prize ball instruction command from the main control CPU 72, and executes the payout operation of the requested number of game balls. The main control CPU 72 generates a prize ball information signal as the external information signal together with the prize ball instruction command.

A payout motor 102 (for example, a stepping motor) and a payout device board 100 are installed in a prize ball case (not shown) of the payout device unit 172. The payout device board 100 is provided with a drive circuit for the payout motor 102. there is The payout device board 100 specifically controls the rotation angle of the payout motor 102 based on the payout number instruction signal from the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94), and pays out the indicated number of game balls from the prize ball case. let out The paid out game balls are sent to the receiving tray unit 6 through the payout channel in the channel unit 173 .

In addition, for example, a payout road ball disconnect switch 104 is installed at the upstream position of the prize ball case, and a payout counting switch 106 is installed at the downstream position of the payout motor 102 . Each time the payout motor 102 is driven to actually pay out the prize balls, a count signal from the payout count switch 106 is input to the payout device board 100 . Also, when the ball runs out at the upstream position of the prize ball case, a contact signal from the payout path ball break switch 104 is input to the payout device board 100 . The payout device board 100 transmits the input count signal and contact signal to the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94). The payout control CPU 94 can detect the actual number of payouts and the out-of-ball state based on the signal received from the payout device board 100 .

Further, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a full tank switch 161, for example, inside the lower tray 6c (at the back when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1). The actually paid out prize balls (game balls) are discharged to the upper tray 6b through the flow path unit 173, but when the upper tray 6b is filled with game balls, more game balls are dispensed. It flows into the lower plate 6c as described above. Furthermore, when the lower tray 6c is filled with game balls, the full tank switch 161 is thereby turned on, and a full tank detection signal is input to the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94). In response to this, the payout control CPU 94 temporarily suspends further prize ball motions even if a prize ball instruction command is received from the main control CPU 72, and stores the remaining number of prize balls that have not been paid out in the RAM 98.例文帳に追加The memory in the RAM 98 can be backed up even when the power is turned off, so even if a power failure (including a momentary power failure) occurs during the game, the remaining number of unpaid prize balls will not be lost. .

Also, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, a firing solenoid 110 is installed together with a firing control board 108. - 特許庁Also, a ball feed solenoid 111 is provided in the tray unit 6 . The firing control board 108, the firing solenoid 110 and the ball feed solenoid 111 constitute the aforementioned firing control board set 174. Of these, the firing control board 108 is provided with drive circuits for the firing solenoid 110 and the ball feed solenoid 111. ing. Among them, the ball feed solenoid 111 performs an operation to feed the game balls stored in the receiving tray unit 6 one by one to a predetermined shooting position within the launcher case. Also, the shooting solenoid 110 hits the game ball sent to the shooting position, and continuously (intermittently) launches the game balls one by one toward the game area 8a as described above. In addition, the shooting interval of the game balls is, for example, an interval of about 0.6 seconds (within 100 balls per minute).

On the other hand, the grip unit 16 located on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a firing lever volume 112, a touch sensor 114 and a firing stop switch . Of these, the firing lever volume 112 generates an analog signal proportional to the amount of operation (so-called stroke) of the firing handle by the player. Also, the touch sensor 114 detects that the player's body is touching the grip unit 16 (firing handle) from a change in capacitance, and outputs a detection signal therefor. The firing stop switch 116 generates a firing stop signal (contact signal) according to the player's operation.

A firing relay terminal plate 118 is installed in the receiving tray unit 6, and each signal from the firing lever volume 112, the touch sensor 114, and the firing stop switch 116 is transmitted via the firing relay terminal plate 118 to the firing control board 108. sent to. A drive signal from the firing control board 108 is applied to the ball feed solenoid 111 via the firing relay terminal plate 118 . When the player operates the firing handle, the firing lever volume 112 generates an analog signal (which may be an encoded digital signal) according to the amount of operation, and the firing solenoid 110 is driven based on the signal at this time. As a result, the strength of hitting the game ball is adjusted according to the amount of operation by the player. The drive circuit of the firing control board 108 stops driving the firing solenoid 110 when the detection signal from the touch sensor 114 is off (low level) or when the firing stop signal is input from the firing stop switch 116. do. In addition, a game ball lending device connection terminal plate 120 is connected to the shooting relay terminal plate 118, and if the CR unit is not connected to the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 120, the shooting relay terminal plate 118 is also connected. The drive circuit on control board 108 stops driving firing solenoid 110 .

Further, the tray unit 6 incorporates a frequency display board 122 and a lending/returning switch board 123 . Of these, the frequency display board 122 is provided with the above-described frequency display unit indicator (three-digit seven-segment LED). In addition, the lending and returning switch board 123 is mounted with switch modules connected to the ball lending button 10 and the returning button 12, respectively. And it is transmitted from the return switch board 123 to the CR unit via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 120 . Also, from the CR unit, a frequency signal indicating the remaining frequency of the valuable medium is transmitted to the frequency display board 122 via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 120 . A display circuit (not shown) on the frequency display substrate 122 drives a display based on the frequency signal to numerically display the remaining frequency of the valuable medium. Further, when no valuable medium is inserted into the CR unit or when the remaining points of the inserted valuable medium become 0, the display circuit of the point display board 122 drives the display to display a demonstration (valuable medium ) can also be displayed.

In addition, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a performance control device 124 (computer for controlling performance) as a control configuration. This performance control device 124 controls the performance accompanying the progress of the game in the pachinko machine 1 . The performance control device 124 is also equipped with a circuit board (composite sub-control board) on which a performance control CPU 126, which is a central processing unit, is mounted. The production control CPU 126 incorporates a CPU core (not shown) and a semiconductor memory such as a ROM 128 and a RAM 130 as a main memory. Note that the effect control device 124 is provided at a position on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 and covered by the back cover unit 178 .

The performance control device 124 is equipped with an input/output driver and various peripheral ICs (not shown), as well as a lamp driving circuit 132 and a sound driving circuit 134 . The production control CPU 126 controls the production based on the production command sent from the main control CPU 72, and gives commands to the lamp drive circuit 132 and the sound drive circuit 134 to light the various lamps 46 to 52 and the board lamp 53. Also, processing for actually outputting sound effects, voices, etc. from the speakers 54 , 55 , 56 is performed.

The effect control device 124 and the main control device 70 are connected to each other via a communication harness (not shown), for example. However, communication between them is performed only in one direction from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124, and communication in the opposite direction is not performed. In addition, the communication harness may adopt a parallel format according to the bus width of various commands transmitted from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124, and each driver IC (I / O) A serial format may be adopted according to the hardware configuration.

The lamp drive circuit 132 includes switching elements such as PWM (pulse width modulation) ICs and MOSFETs (not shown). ) to manage its operation such as light emission and blinking. In addition to the glass frame top lamp 46 and the glass frame decoration lamps 48, 50 and 52, the various lamps include a board surface lamp 53 installed in the game board unit 8 for decoration and presentation. The board lamp 53 corresponds to the LED built in the effect unit or the LED built in the variable starting prize winning device 28, the first variable prize winning device 30, the second variable prize winning device 31, and the like. Here, an example in which the glass-framed decorative lamp 52 is connected to the glass-framed decorative board 136 is given. It may be configured to be connected to the lamp driving circuit 132 through the substrate.

The acoustic drive circuit 134 is a sound generator containing, for example, a sound ROM, an acoustic control IC, an amplifier, etc. (not shown). to output sound.

In this embodiment, a glass-framed electric board 136 is installed on the inner surface of the integrated door unit 4, and the driving signals from the lamp drive circuit 132 and the sound drive circuit 134 are sent to various lamps 46 via the glass-framed electric board 136. 52 and speakers 54, 55 and 56. The push button 45a and the lever member 45b are connected to the glass-frame electric board 136, and when the player operates the push button 45a and the lever member 45b, the contact signal is sent to the glass-frame electric board 136. It is input to the production control device 124 through. Furthermore, the cross key button 44 is connected to the glass frame electric decoration board 136 , and when the player operates the cross key button 44 , the contact signal is transmitted through the glass frame electric decoration board 136 to the production control device 124 . is entered in Here, an example in which the push button 45a, the lever member 45b, and the cross key button 44 are connected to the glass-framed decorative substrate 136 is given. 45b and the cross key button 44 may be connected to the saucer illumination board. In addition, a panel electric decoration board 138 is installed in the game board unit 8 , and a movable body motor 57 is connected to the panel electric decoration board 138 in addition to the board surface lamp 53 . The movable body motor 57 drives the movable body 40f via, for example, a link mechanism (not shown). A drive signal from the lamp drive circuit 132 is applied to the board surface lamp 53 and the movable body motor 57 via the panel illumination board 138 . Note that the movable body motor 57 may be a solenoid.

A button motor 45 d is connected to the glass-framed electrical board 136 .
The button motor 45 d is a stepping motor that raises and lowers the push button 45 a and is driven by an operation unit controller (not shown) that controls the operation unit 45 . The operation unit control device drives the button motor 45d based on the drive signal transmitted from the effect control device 124, thereby setting the push button 45a to either the normal state (initial position) or the projected state (maximum movable position). can be displaced.

A 7-segment display device 200 and a storage display device 300 are also connected to the effect control device 124 . The 7-segment display device 200 and the storage display device 300 are driven by a control device (driver, IC) (not shown) that controls these devices. The production control device 124 (production control CPU 126) controls the 7-segment display device 200 and the storage display device 300 through a control device (not shown).

The liquid crystal display 42 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8 , and the display screen thereof can be visually recognized through a substantially rectangular opening formed in the game board unit 8 . In addition, an inverter board 158 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and this inverter board 158 generates AC power applied to the backlight of the liquid crystal display 42 (for example, a cold cathode tube). Further, an effect display control device 144 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and the display operation of the liquid crystal display 42 is controlled by the effect display control device 144. FIG. The effect display control device 144 is equipped with a display control CPU 146 as a general-purpose central processing unit and a circuit board (effect display control board) on which a VDP 152 as a display processor is mounted. Among them, the display control CPU 146 is configured as an LSI in which semiconductor memories such as a ROM 148 and a RAM 150 are integrated together with a CPU core (not shown). The VDP 152 is configured as an LSI in which semiconductor memories such as an image ROM 154 and a VRAM 156 are integrated together with a processor core (not shown). A part of the storage area of the VRAM 156 can be used as a frame buffer.

The ROM 128 of the effect control CPU 126 stores a basic program relating to the control of the effect, and the effect control CPU 126 executes control of the effect according to this program. Control of effects includes control of effects using various lamps 46 to 53 and speakers 54, 55, 56 as described above, and control of effects by image display using liquid crystal display 42. . The effect control CPU 126 transmits basic information (for example, effect number) related to the effect to the display control CPU 146, and the display control CPU 146 that receives this transmits a specific image for effect based on the basic information. Control the display.

The display control CPU 146 outputs further detailed control signals to the VDP 152 . The VDP 152 having received this accesses the image ROM 154 based on the control signal, reads the necessary image data therefrom, and transfers it to the VRAM 156 . Furthermore, the VDP 152 develops the image data on the VRAM 156 into a frame buffer for each frame (still image per unit time), and based on the image data buffered here, each pixel (full-color pixel) of the liquid crystal display 42 is individually displayed. to drive.

In addition, a power control unit 162 (power control means) is provided on the back side of the inner frame assembly 7 . This power supply control unit 162 incorporates a switching power supply circuit, and when it takes in external power (for example, AC 24V, etc.) from the island equipment through the power cord 164, it can generate necessary power (for example, DC +34V, +12V, etc.). The power generated by the power control unit 162 is distributed to the main control device 70 , the payout control device 92 , the performance control device 124 and the inverter board 158 . Further, power is supplied to the launch control board 108 via the payout control device 92, and power is supplied to the CR unit via the terminal board 120 for lending equipment such as game balls. Low-voltage power (for example, DC +5V) for logic is generated by a power supply IC (three-terminal regulator or the like) built in each device. Further, the power supply control unit 162 is grounded to the island facility through the ground wire 166 as described above.

The external terminal board 160 is connected to the payout control device 92, and various external information signals generated by the main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) are sent to the external terminal board 160 via the payout control device 92. is output to the outside from The main control device 70 (main control CPU 72 ) and payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94 ) can output external information signals to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 through the external terminal board 160 . Signals output from the external terminal board 160 are counted by, for example, a hall computer (not shown) of the game arcade. In addition, although the configuration via the payout control device 92 is taken as an example here, the configuration may be such that the external information signal is directly output from the main control device 70 to the external terminal board 160 .

The above is an example of the configuration relating to the control of the pachinko machine 1 . Next, control processing executed by the main control CPU 72 of the main controller 70 will be described.

[Reset start (main) processing]
When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main control CPU 72 starts reset start processing. The reset start process prepares the initial state of the pachinko machine 1 by restoring the game state (so-called power recovery) based on the backup information saved at the time of the previous power shutdown, or by clearing the backup information. This process is for Further, the reset start process is positioned as a main process (main control program) for ensuring stable game operation of the pachinko machine 1 after adjustment of the initial state.

15 and 16 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of reset start processing. Each procedure of the processing performed by the main control CPU 72 will be described below.

Step S101: The main control CPU 72 first sets the top address of the stack area in the stack pointer.

Step S102: Subsequently, the main control CPU 72 sets the vector type interrupt mode (mode 2) and modifies the default RST type interrupt mode (mode 0). As a result, the main control CPU 72 can thereafter refer to any address (however, the least significant bit is 0) as an interrupt vector and execute the specified interrupt handler.

Step S103: The main control CPU 72 executes a reset standby process here. This process secures a certain amount of waiting time (for example, about several thousand milliseconds) at the time of reset start (for example, turning on the power), and checks the main power interruption detection signal during that time. Specifically, when the main control CPU 72 sets the loop counter for the standby time, it bit-checks the input port of the main power interruption detection signal while decrementing the value of the loop counter. The main power failure detection signal is input from, for example, a power monitor IC, which is a peripheral device. When the input of the main power interruption detection signal is confirmed before the loop counter reaches 0, the main control CPU 72 restarts the processing from the beginning. As a result, it is possible to protect the system even if the main power switch (not shown) is repeatedly turned on and off within a short period of time (about 1 to 2 seconds).

Step S104: Next, the main control CPU72 permits access to the work area of the RAM76. Specifically, the RAM protect setting value of the work area is reset (00H). As a result, access to the work area of the RAM 76 is permitted thereafter.

Step S105: Also, the main control CPU 72 initializes the mask register to set the interrupt mask. Specifically, a value that enables the CTC interrupt is stored in the mask register.

Step S106: The main control CPU 72 refers to the previously saved input signal from the RAM clear switch and confirms whether or not the RAM clear switch has been operated (switched ON). If the RAM clear switch has not been operated (No), then step S107 is executed.

Step S107: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether backup information is stored in the RAM 76, that is, whether the backup validity determination flag is set. If the backup was successfully completed in the previous power-off process and the backup validity determination flag (for example, "A55AH") is set (Yes), then the main control CPU 72 executes step S108.

Step S108: The main control CPU72 performs a sum check on the backup information in the RAM76. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sum-checks all areas of the work area of the RAM 76 (user work area including use-prohibited area and stack area) except for the backup validity determination flag and the sum check buffer. If the sum check result is normal (Yes), then the main control CPU 72 executes step S109.

Step S109: The main control CPU 72 resets the backup validity determination flag (for example, "0000H").
Step S110: Also, the main control CPU 72 clears the command that was waiting for transmission immediately before the previous power failure occurred.

Step S111: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes effect control return processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sends the effect control device 124 a return command (for example, model designation command, special symbol probability state designation command, effect command when the number of working memories is increased, effect command when the number of working memories is decreased, number of cuts counter command, special game state designation command, etc.). In response to this, the effect control device 124 changes the effect state that was being executed at the time of the previous power shutdown (for example, internal probability state, display mode of the effect pattern, effect display mode of the working memory number, sound output content, various lamps light emission state, etc.) can be restored.

Step S112: The main control CPU 72 executes state return processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets various values in the work area of the RAM 76 based on the backup information, and the game state that was being executed at the time of the previous power shutdown (for example, the display mode of special symbols, the internal probability state, working memory contents, various flag states, random number update state, etc.). Also, the main control CPU 72 restores the value of the PC register that was backed up.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch is operated when the power is turned on (step S106: Yes), if the backup validity determination flag is not set (step S107: No), or if the backup information is not normal (Step S108: No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S113.

Step S113: The main control CPU 72 clears the storage contents of the RAM 76 other than the prohibited area. As a result, the work area and stack area of the RAM 76 are all initialized, and even if valid backup information is stored, the contents thereof are erased.
Step S114: The main control CPU72 also initializes the RAM76.

Step S115: The main control CPU 72 executes effect control output processing. In this process, the main control CPU72 outputs a command (a command necessary for effect control) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124 after initial setting.

Step S116: The main control CPU 72 executes payout control output processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs an instruction command to the payout control device 92 to start paying out prize balls.

Step S117: The main control CPU 72 executes CTC initial setting processing to initialize the CTC (counter/timer circuit) which is a peripheral device. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets an interrupt vector register and also sets an interrupt count value (eg 4 ms) in the CTC. As a result, when the next CTC interrupt occurs, the main control CPU 72 can continue processing from the program address of the backed-up PC register.

After executing the above procedure in the reset start process, the main control CPU 72 shifts to the main loop shown in FIG. 16 (connection symbol A→A).

Steps S118 and S119: The main control CPU 72 prohibits interrupts, and then executes power failure check processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 bit-checks the input port of the main power interruption detection signal and monitors the occurrence of power interruption (drop in drive voltage). When a power cutoff occurs, the main control CPU 72 clears the output port buffers corresponding to the normal electric accessory solenoid 88, the big winning opening solenoid 90, etc., and the entire work area of the RAM 76 except for the backup validity determination flag and the sum check buffer. and store the sum result value in the sum check buffer. Then, the main control CPU 72 stores the valid value (for example, "A55AH") in the backup validity determination flag area, prohibits access to the RAM 76, and stops processing (NOP). On the other hand, if power shutdown does not occur, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S120. It should be noted that there is a well-known example of programming that causes the CPU to execute such processing when power failure occurs as non-maskable interrupt (NMI) processing.

Step S120: The main control CPU 72 executes an initial value update random number update process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 increments random numbers for updating (changing) the initial values of various software random numbers. In this embodiment, various random numbers (for example, jackpot design random numbers, reach determination random numbers, variation pattern determination random numbers, etc.) except for the jackpot determination random numbers (hardware random numbers) and the hit determination random numbers corresponding to normal symbols (hardware random numbers) is generated programmatically. These software random numbers are updated by a loop counter within a predetermined range in another interrupt process (step S201 in FIG. 18). ) is changed. The initial value update random number is used to randomly change this initial value, and in step S120, the initial value update random number is updated. The reason why step S120 is executed after prohibiting interrupts in step S118 is that the same processing is executed in another interrupt management processing (step S202 in FIG. 18). ) is to prevent As described above, in this embodiment, the jackpot determination random number and the winning determination random number are hardware random numbers generated by the random number generator 75, and the update period thereof is faster than the timer interrupt period (eg, several ms). (for example, several μs), there is no need to update the initial values of the jackpot determination random number and the winning determination random number.

Steps S121, S122: The main control CPU 72 permits interrupts and executes random number update processing. The random numbers updated in this process are random numbers (reach determination random numbers, fluctuation pattern determination random numbers, etc.) that are not related to determination of winning types (hit types) among software random numbers. This process is performed in the remaining time when a timer interrupt occurs during execution of the main loop and the main control CPU 72 executes another interrupt management process (FIG. 18). The content of the interrupt management process will be described later.

[Power failure check process]
FIG. 17 is a flow chart specifically showing a procedure example of the above-described power failure occurrence check process.
Step S130: Here, first, the main control CPU 72 sets the conditions for checking the occurrence of power failure. This check condition can be set, for example, as an on-counter value for confirming that the main power interruption detection signal is continuously output.

Step S132: Next, the main control CPU 72 reads the main power interruption detection switch input port and confirms whether or not the main power interruption detection signal is output (checks a specific bit). Although not particularly shown, a main power disconnection detection switch is mounted, for example, in the main controller 70. This main power disconnection detection switch monitors the drive voltage supplied from the power control unit 162, and the voltage level is When the voltage falls below the reference voltage, the main power supply disconnection detection signal is output. Note that the main power disconnection detection switch may be incorporated in the power control unit 162 . When the main control CPU 72 confirms that the main power interruption detection signal is not output at this time (No), it exits this process and returns to the reset start process. On the other hand, if it is confirmed that the main power disconnection detection signal has been output (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S134.

Step S134: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the above check conditions are satisfied. Specifically, for example, 1 is subtracted from the on-counter value set in the previous step S130, and it is confirmed whether the result is 0 or not. If the on-counter value is still not 0 at this time (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to step S132 and checks the main power interruption detection switch input port again. Then, when the loop from step S134 to step S132 is repeated and the check condition is satisfied (step S134: Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S136.

Step S136: The main control CPU 72 clears the output port buffer corresponding to the test signal terminal and the command control signal in addition to the output port corresponding to the normal electric accessory solenoid 88 and the big winning opening solenoid 90 as described above.

Steps S138, S140: Next, the main control CPU 72 adds the entire contents of the work area of the RAM 76, excluding the backup validity determination flag and the sum check buffer, in 1-byte units, and repeats the addition for all areas until the addition is completed. .
Step S142: When sum calculation is completed for all areas (step S140: Yes), the main control CPU 72 saves the sum result value in the sum check buffer.

Step S144: Next, the main control CPU 72 stores the validity value in the backup validity determination flag area as described above.
Step S146: In addition, the main control CPU 72 stores "01H" indicating access prohibition in the protect value of the RAM 76, and prohibits access to the work area (including the use prohibited area and stack area) of the RAM 76.
Step S148: Then, the main control CPU 72 enters a standby loop, and stops all other processes in preparation for the shutdown of the main power supply. After the main power supply is cut off, backup power is supplied from a backup power supply circuit (not shown) (for example, a circuit including a capacitive element mounted on the main controller 70). held without. The backup power supply circuit may be built in the power control unit 162, for example.

Through the above processing, all the information stored in the work area of the RAM 76 to be backed up (to be added to the sum) is retained in the RAM 76 even after the main power is turned off. In addition, the retained memory is restored as backup information when the power is turned off after confirming that the checksum is normal in the previous reset start process (FIG. 15).

[Interrupt management processing (timer interrupt processing)]
Next, interrupt management processing (timer interrupt processing) will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of interrupt management processing. The main control CPU 72 executes an interrupt management process every predetermined time (for example, several milliseconds) based on an interrupt request signal from the counter/timer circuit. Each procedure will be described below.

Step S200: First, the main control CPU72 saves the values of the registers (each pair of the accumulator A and the flag register F, and the general-purpose registers B to L) used during the execution of the main loop to the saving area of the RAM76. Another value can be written to the registers (A to L) after saving the values during the interrupt management process.

Step S201: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes lottery random number update processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 updates the value of the counter for generating various random numbers for lottery. The value of each counter is incremented in the counter area of the RAM 76 and looped within a prescribed range. Various random numbers include, for example, jackpot symbol random numbers.

Step S202: The main control CPU 72 also executes the initial value update random number update process here. The contents of the processing are the same as those described above.

Step S203: The main control CPU 72 executes input processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 inputs various switch signals from an input/output (I/O) port 79 . Specifically, the passage detection signal from the gate switch 78, the starting device left starting winning port switch 78a, the starting device middle starting winning port switch 80, the starting device right starting winning port switch 81, the right starting winning port switch 82, the third The input state (ON/OFF) of the winning detection signal from the 1 count switch 84, the second count switch 85, the winning opening switch 86, and the specific area switch 83 is read.

Step S204: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes switch input event processing. In this processing, among the switch signals input in the previous input processing, the gate switch 78, the starting device left starting winning port switch 78a, the starting device middle starting winning port switch 80, the starting device right starting winning port switch 81, and the right starting winning port switch 81 Based on the passage detection signals from the mouth switch 82, the first count switch 84, the second count switch 85, and the specific area switch 83, an event that occurred during the game is judged, and another Execute the process. The specific contents of the switch input event processing will be described later using another flowchart.

In this embodiment, when a winning detection signal (ON) is input from the starting device middle starting winning port switch 80 or the starting device right starting winning port switch 81, the main control CPU 72 executes an internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol. It is determined that an event that serves as an opportunity (lottery opportunity, first lottery opportunity, lottery opportunity for the first special symbol lottery) has occurred.
In addition, when the winning detection signal (ON) is input from the right start winning opening switch 82, the main control CPU 72 generates an internal lottery opportunity corresponding to the second special symbol (lottery opportunity, second lottery opportunity, second special symbol It is determined that an event that serves as a lottery trigger for a lottery has occurred.
Furthermore, when the passage detection signal (ON) is input from the gate switch 78, or when the winning detection signal (ON) is input from the starting device left start winning opening switch 78a, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the normal symbol. It is determined that an event that triggers the lottery has occurred.

When determining that any event has occurred, the main control CPU 72 executes processing according to each occurrence event. It should be noted that the processing executed when the winning detection signal is input from the starting device middle start winning port switch 80, the starting device right starting winning port switch 81 or the right starting winning port switch 82 will be described using a further flowchart. will be described later.

Step S205, step S206: The main control CPU 72 executes the special symbol game process and the normal symbol game process during the interrupt management process. These processes are for specifically advancing the game in the pachinko machine 1 . Among these, in the special symbol game process (step S205), the main control CPU72 controls the execution of the internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol described above, or the first special symbol display device 34 and the second It controls the variable display and stop display by the 2 special symbol display device 35, and controls the operation of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 according to the display result. Details of the special symbol game process will be described later using another flowchart.

In addition, in the normal symbol game process (step S206), the main control CPU72 controls the variable display and stop display by the normal symbol display device 33 described above, and operates the variable start winning device 28 according to the display result. to control. For example, the main control CPU72 stores the random number (determined random number per normal symbol) acquired with the passage of the start gate 20 in the previous switch input event process (step S204), and in this normal symbol game process A random number value is read out from the memory, and it is determined whether or not it falls within a predetermined hit range (normal symbol lottery executing means). When the random number falls within the winning range, the normal symbols are variably displayed by the normal symbol display device 33, and the normal symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined winning manner. It is excited to operate the variable starting prize winning device 28 (movable piece operating means). On the other hand, if the random number is out of the hit range, the main control CPU 72 performs stop display of normal symbols in a manner of deviation after the variable display.

In addition, in this embodiment, by turning on and off the three LEDs of the normal design display device 33 in order, the fluctuation display of the normal design is performed, and among the three upper and lower LEDs, for example, the upper LED is lit. , a stop display can be performed at the time of non-winning, and a stop display at the time of winning can be performed in a state where one of the two LEDs below is lit. As for which of the two LEDs below is to be lit, the main control CPU 72 is based on the stop pattern number at the time of winning determined by lottery at the time of winning, and the stop pattern (hit pattern) by the normal design display device 33. Determines the display mode of

For example, when the winning probability of normal symbols is approximately 1/1 in the non-reduced time state, the distribution ratio between the two types of winning symbols 1 and 2 is "1300:1". That is, the probability of matching the winning pattern 1 is "1299/1300", and the probability of matching the winning pattern 2 is "1/1300". And when it corresponds to the winning pattern 1, the variable starting winning device 28 is short-opened (0.1 seconds open), so it is difficult for the game ball to enter the variable starting winning device 28. On the other hand, when it corresponds to the winning pattern 2, the variable starting prize winning device 28 is opened for a long time (open for 6.0 seconds), so there is a chance to enter the game ball into the variable starting prize winning device 28 even in the non-shortening state. occurs.

In this embodiment, when the normal symbols change 1300 times, the variable starting prize winning device 28 opens long at a rate of about 1 time by setting the distribution rate of the winning symbols in this manner. In addition, in the time shortening state, the variable starting winning device 28 opens long regardless of whether the winning symbol 1 or the winning symbol 2 is achieved. In this case, the winning pattern 1 and the winning pattern 2 can have different opening patterns. Further, the main control CPU 72 transmits a variable start winning device long open start command to the effect control device 124 when the variable start winning device 28 is to be long opened in the non-time shortening state.

Step S207: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes prize ball payout processing. In this process, based on the winning detection signal input from the various switches 78a, 80, 81, 82, 84, 85, 86 in the previous input process (step S203), the number of prize balls is instructed to the payout control device 92. Outputs a prize ball instruction command. The number of prize balls can be arbitrarily set according to the specifications of the game. For example, the number of prize balls in the start winning opening corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 4, the number of prize balls in the starting winning opening corresponding to the normal symbol is 1, and the first big winning opening. And the number of prize balls for the second big prize opening is 15, and the number of prize balls for the normal prize opening is 4. Information on the number of prize balls can also be transmitted to the effect control device 124 as a prize content command.

[Regarding the number of prize balls and the number of winning game balls]
The number of prize balls for the start opening of the first special symbol and the number of prize balls for the start opening of the second special symbol are each set to a prescribed number of one or more. Also, the number of winning balls may be different between the starting opening of the first special symbol and the starting opening of the second special symbol. In addition, the minimum number of prize balls is set based on the winning probability of special symbols and the expected value of the total number of game balls acquired (average number of balls obtained in a series of periods from the first hit to the end of the time reduction state). You may Furthermore, the probability of winning a special pattern, the expected value of the total number of game balls acquired, the number of times the large winning opening is opened, the opening time of the large winning opening, the maximum number of winnings of the large winning opening, and the number of winning balls of the large winning opening are specified. When the conditions are satisfied, a big win may be set in which the number of game balls acquired by one big win is less than 1/4 of the maximum number of acquired game balls.

Step S207a: The main control CPU 72 executes solenoid management processing. In this processing, the main control CPU 72 controls the operation of the starting device right solenoid 481 and the starting device left solenoid 491 which are always movable after the power is turned on.

Step S208: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes external information processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sends the above-mentioned external information signals (e.g. winning ball information, door opening information, pattern determination number information, jackpot information, start opening) to the hall computer (external device) of the game hall through the external terminal board 160. information, etc.) in the port output request buffer.

In this embodiment, among various external information signals, for example, "jackpot 1" to "jackpot 5" are output as jackpot information to the outside, so that an external electronic device (data display (external information signal output means). That is, by dividing the jackpot information into a plurality of "jackpots 1" to "jackpots 5" and outputting them, the types of jackpots (types of winnings) can be tabulated and managed by a hall computer (not shown) from these combinations. Occurrence of small hits that are not classified as "big hits" even if they recognize changes in the probability state (low probability state or high probability state) or the shortened state of symbol fluctuation time (hit that does not operate the conditional device) even if it is not winning. can be aggregated and managed. Also, based on the jackpot information, for example, a data display device (not shown) counts and displays the number of jackpot occurrences within the past several business days for each pachinko machine 1, and recognizes whether or not each machine is currently jackpotting. Alternatively, it is possible to recognize whether or not the current symbol variation time is shortened for each machine. In this external information processing, the main control CPU 72 controls in detail the respective output states (set of ON or OFF) of "jackpot 1" to "jackpot 5".

Step S209: The main control CPU 72 also executes test signal processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates various test signals representing its own internal state (for example, normal symbol game management state, special symbol game management state, jackpot, probability variation function in operation, time reduction function in operation). and store them in the port output request buffer. With this test signal, the internal state of the main control CPU 72 can be tested outside the main control device 70, for example.

Step S210: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes display output management processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 includes the normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, the first special symbol display device 34, the second special symbol display device 35, the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, and the second special symbol. It controls lighting states of the operation memory lamp 35a, the game state display device 38, and the like. Specifically, the drive signal stored in the port output request buffer in the previous special symbol game process (step S205) or normal symbol game process (step S206) is port-output. The drive signal is stored in the port output request buffer as byte data to be applied to each LED. As a result, each LED is driven in a predetermined display mode (a mode in which symbols are displayed in a variable manner, a stop display, a working memory number display, a game state display, etc.).

Step S211: The main control CPU 72 also executes output management processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs the external information signal (byte data) stored in the port output request buffer in the previous external information processing (step S208). In addition, the main control CPU 72 outputs drive signals and test signals for the normal electric accessory solenoid 88, the first big winning opening solenoid 90, the second big winning opening solenoid 97 and the specific area solenoid 99 stored in the port output request buffer. etc. are combined and output to the port.

Step S212: The main control CPU 72 executes effect control output processing. In this process, the main control CPU72 in the command buffer to check whether there is a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124 (command necessary for effect control), if there is an unsent command command to be output port output.

Step S213: Then, the main control CPU 72 clears the port output request buffer stored in this CTC interrupt.

It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, an example is given in which the processing of steps S205 to S212 (game control program module) is executed as a timer interrupt processing, but these processing are executed by incorporating them into the main loop of the CPU. There are also known programming examples.

Step S214: After completing the above processing, the main control CPU 72 stores a value (01H) designating the end of the interrupt in the interrupt program counter and ends the CTC interrupt.

Steps S215, S216: Then, the main control CPU 72 restores the values of the saved registers (A to L) and permits the next CTC interrupt. After that, the main control CPU 72 returns to the main loop (the program address indicated by the stack pointer).

[Switch input event processing]
FIG. 19 is a flow chart showing a procedure example of switch input event processing (step S204 in FIG. 18). Each procedure will be described below.

Step S10: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal has been input (a lottery opportunity has occurred) from the starting device middle starting winning port switch 80 or the starting device right starting winning port switch 81 corresponding to the first special symbol. do. When the input of this winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S12 and executes the first special symbol memory update process. The specific contents of the processing will be further described later using another flowchart. On the other hand, if there is no winning detection signal input (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S14.

Step S14: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal has been input (a lottery opportunity has occurred) from the right start winning opening switch 82 corresponding to the second special symbol. When the input of this winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S16 and executes the second special symbol memory update process. Here, similarly, the specific contents of the processing will be further described later using another flowchart. On the other hand, if there is no winning detection signal input (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S18.

Step S18: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal has been input from the first count switch 84 corresponding to the first big winning port 30b of the first variable winning device 30 or not. When the input of this winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S19 and executes the first big winning opening counting process. In the first big winning hole counting process, the main control CPU 72 counts the number of winning balls to the first variable winning device 30 for each round during the big winning game. On the other hand, if there is no winning detection signal input (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S20.

Step S20: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal is input from the second count switch 85 corresponding to the second big winning port 31b of the second variable winning device 31. When the input of this winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S21 and executes the second big winning opening counting process. In the second big winning hole counting process, the main control CPU 72 counts the number of winning balls to the second variable winning device 31 during the big winning game (during the small winning game). On the other hand, if the winning detection signal has not been input (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S22.

Step S22: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a detection signal has been input from the gate switch 78 corresponding to the normal symbol or the starting device left start winning opening switch 78a. If the input of this detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S24. On the other hand, if the detection signal has not been input (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S26.

Step S24: The main control CPU 72 executes normal symbol memory update processing. In the normal symbol memory update process, the main control CPU 72 checks whether the current normal symbol working memory number is less than the upper limit number (for example, 4), and if it does not reach the upper limit number, it is necessary for the normal symbol lottery. Acquire various random numbers (normal random numbers per symbol, etc.). Also, the main control CPU 72 increments the normal symbol working memory number by one. Then, the main control CPU 72 stores the acquired random number values in the random number storage area of the RAM 76 . Next, the main control CPU 72 executes step S26.

Step S26: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a passing detection signal has been input from the specific area switch 83 corresponding to the specific area 31x in the second big winning opening 31b. When the input of this passage detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S28 and executes processing to turn ON the specific area reserve flag. On the other hand, if there is no passage detection signal input (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the interrupt management process (FIG. 18).

[First special symbol memory update process]
FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing a procedure example of the first special symbol memory updating process (step S12 in FIG. 19). Hereinafter, the procedure of the first special symbol memory updating process will be described step by step.

Step S30: Here, first, the main control CPU72 refers to the value of the first special symbol working memory number counter, and confirms whether or not the working memory number is less than the maximum value (for example, 4). The working memory number counter represents the number (number of sets) of the jackpot determination random numbers, the jackpot pattern random numbers, etc. stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76 . Here, the random number storage area of the RAM 76 is divided into eight sections (for example, 2 bytes each) commonly used for the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Random numbers can be stored in sets (groups) one by one. At this time, if the value of the working memory number counter corresponding to the first special symbol has reached the maximum value (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event process (FIG. 19). On the other hand, if the value of the working memory number counter is less than the maximum value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S31.

Step S31: The main control CPU72 adds one to the first special symbol working memory number. The first special symbol working memory number counter is stored, for example, in the working memory number area of the RAM 76, and the main control CPU 72 increments (+1) the value. Based on the value of the counter added here, the lighting state of the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a is controlled in the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 18).

Step S32: Then, the main control CPU 72 acquires a big hit determination random value corresponding to the first special symbol from the random number generator 75 through the sampling circuit 77 (acquisition of the first lottery element, lottery element acquisition means). A random number is obtained by designating the pin address of the random number generator 75 . When the main control CPU 72 performs 8-bit processing, address designation is performed in two batches of 1 byte each for the upper and lower bytes. When the main control CPU 72 reads the jackpot determination random number from the specified address, it saves it as the jackpot determination random number corresponding to the first special symbol at the transfer destination address.

Step S33: Next, the main control CPU 72 acquires the jackpot symbol random number value corresponding to the first special symbol from the jackpot symbol random number counter area of the RAM 76 (lottery element acquisition means). Acquisition of this random number value is also performed by designating the address of the jackpot symbol random number counter area. When the main control CPU 72 reads the jackpot design random number from the designated address, it saves it as the jackpot design random number corresponding to the first special design at the transfer destination address.

Step S34: In addition, the main control CPU72 sequentially acquires the reach determination random number and the variation pattern determination random number from the variation random number counter area of the RAM76 as the random value related to the variation condition of the first special symbol (variation pattern determination element acquisition means, lottery element acquisition means). Acquisition of these random numbers is similarly performed by designating the address of the variable random number counter area. Then, when the main control CPU 72 acquires the reach determination random number and the variation pattern determination random number from the specified address, it saves them to the transfer destination address.

Step S35: The main control CPU 72 transfers the saved jackpot determination random number, jackpot pattern random number, reach determination random number, and fluctuation pattern determination random number to the random number storage area corresponding to the first special symbol, and stores these random numbers in the empty section of the area. (first lottery element storage means, lottery element storage means). An order (for example, 1st to 4th) is set for a plurality of sections, and if all the 1st to 4th sections are empty at the present stage, each random number is stored in order from the first section. Alternatively, if the first section is already filled and the other second to fourth sections are empty, each random number is stored in order from the second section. Note that reading from the random number storage area is in FIFO (First In First Out) format.

Step S36: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current special game management status (game state) is in the middle of a big hit. If it is other than during a big hit (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the following steps S37 and S38. If it is a big hit (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips steps S37 and S38 and proceeds to step S38a. The reason why this determination is made in the present embodiment is that the performance based on the prediction is not performed for the ball entering during the big hit.

Step S37: In the case other than during the big hit (step S36: No), the main control CPU72 executes the effect determination process at the time of acquisition with respect to the first special symbol (look-ahead process execution means). This process is based on the first special symbol jackpot determination random number, the jackpot pattern random number, and the variation pattern determination random number obtained in the previous steps S32 to S34, the result of the special symbol lottery and the variation time in advance (before the start of variation). It is for determining the content of the effect (so-called "prefetching"). In this process, the result of the prior determination of the first special symbol is set to the lower byte portion of the special figure destination determination effect command (prefetch information).

Step S38: After executing the effect determination process at the time of acquisition, the main control CPU72 next sets the upper byte portion (for example, "B8H") of the special figure destination determination effect command with respect to the first special symbol (prefetching process executing means). This high-order byte data describes that the command type is "for the special figure destination determination production for the first special symbol". In addition, since the lower byte portion of the special figure destination judgment effect command (information on success or failure and information on fluctuation time) is set in the previous acquisition time effect determination process (step S37), here the upper byte is combined with the lower byte By doing so, for example, a 1-word long command is generated.

Step S38a: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets the production command when the number of working memories increases with respect to the first special symbol. Specifically, a one-word-length command is obtained by adding the increased number of working memories (eg, "01H" to "04H") to the lower byte of the preceding value (eg, "BBH") of the upper byte representing the type of command. Generate production commands. At this time, the second digit of the low-order byte is set to "0" by default to indicate that the value is "a result of an increase in the number of working memories (change information)". In other words, if the lower byte is "01H", it indicates that the current working memory number is "01H" as a result of incrementing by one from the previous working memory number "00H". Similarly, if the lower byte is ``02H'' to ``04H'', it means that the number of working memories ``01H'' to ``03H'' up to the previous time has increased by 1, resulting in the number of working memories ``02H'' to ``02H'' to `` 04H”. In addition, the preceding value "BBH" is a value indicating that the current production command is the working memory number command for the first special symbol.

Step S39: Then, the main control CPU 72 executes the effect command output setting process with respect to the first special symbol. In this process, the special figure destination determination effect command generated in the previous step S38, the effect command at the time of increasing the number of working memories generated in step S38a, and the starting entrance winning sound control command are transmitted to the effect control device 124 ( memory number notification means).

If the above procedure is completed, or if the number of first special symbol working memories has reached 4 (step S30: No), the main control CPU72 returns to the switch input event process (FIG. 19).

[Second special symbol memory update process]
Next, FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing a procedure example of the second special symbol memory updating process (step S16 in FIG. 19). Hereinafter, the procedure of the second special symbol memory updating process will be described step by step.

Step S40: The main control CPU72 refers to the value of the second special symbol working memory number counter and checks whether or not the working memory number is less than the maximum value. Similarly to the above, the second special symbol working memory number counter also indicates the number (number of sets) of the jackpot decision random numbers and jackpot pattern random numbers stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76 . At this time, if the value of the second special symbol working memory number counter reaches the maximum value (for example, 4) (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event process (FIG. 19). On the other hand, if the value of the second special symbol working memory number counter is still less than the maximum value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S41 and subsequent steps.

Step S41: The main control CPU72 adds one to the second special symbol working memory number (increments the value of the second special symbol working memory number counter). Similar to the previous step S31 (FIG. 20), based on the value of the counter added here, the lighting state of the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a is controlled in the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 18). will be

Step S42: Then, the main control CPU 72 acquires the big hit determination random number value corresponding to the second special symbol from the random number generator 75 through the sampling circuit 77 (acquisition of the second lottery element, lottery element acquisition means). The method of obtaining the random number value is the same as in step S32 (FIG. 20) described above.

Step S43: Next, the main control CPU 72 acquires the jackpot symbol random number value corresponding to the second special symbol from the jackpot symbol random number counter area of the RAM 76 (lottery element acquisition means). The method of obtaining the random value is the same as in step S33 (FIG. 20) described above.

Step S44: In addition, the main control CPU72 sequentially acquires the reach determination random number and the variation pattern determination random number regarding the variation condition of the second special symbol from the variation random number counter area of the RAM76 (variation pattern determination element acquisition means, lottery element acquisition means). Acquisition of these random numbers is also performed in the same manner as in step S34 (FIG. 20) described above.

Step S45: The main control CPU 72 transfers the saved jackpot determination random numbers, jackpot pattern random numbers, reach determination random numbers, and variation pattern determination random numbers to the random number storage area corresponding to the second special symbol, and stores these random numbers in the empty section of the area. (second lottery element storage means, lottery element storage means). The storage method is the same as that of step S35 (FIG. 20) described above.

Step S45a: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current game management status (game state) is in the middle of a big hit. Then, if it is other than during the big hit (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the following steps S46 and S47. Conversely, if the jackpot is in progress (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips steps S46 and S47 and proceeds to step S48. The reason why this determination is made in the present embodiment is that, likewise, an effect based on prediction is not performed for a ball entering during a big hit.

Step S46: If it is not during the big hit (step S45a: No), then the main control CPU72 executes the effect determination process at the time of acquisition with respect to the second special symbol (look-ahead process execution means). In this process, the result of the internal lottery is determined in advance (before the start of fluctuation) based on the second special symbol jackpot determination random number and the jackpot pattern random number obtained in the previous steps S42 to S44, respectively, and the effect contents are determined accordingly. It is for judging. In this process, the result of the preliminary determination of the second special symbol is set to the lower byte portion of the special figure destination determination effect command.

Step S47: After executing the effect determination process at the time of acquisition, the main control CPU72 next sets the upper byte portion (for example, "B9H") of the special figure destination determination effect command (prefetching process executing means). This high-order byte data describes that the command type is "for the special figure destination determination performance regarding the second special symbol". Here as well, the lower byte portion of the special figure destination determination effect command is set in the previous acquisition time effect determination process (step S46). command will be generated.

Step S48: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets the production command when the number of working memories increases with respect to the second special symbol. Here, a one-word-length effect command is obtained by adding the increased working memory number (eg, "01H" to "04H") to the lower byte of the preceding value (eg, "BCH") of the upper byte representing the command type. to generate Similarly, for the second special symbol, by setting the second digit of the low-order byte to "0" by default, it is possible to express that the value is "the result of an increase in the number of working memories (change information)". can. It should be noted that the preceding value "BCH" is a value indicating that the current production command is the working memory number command for the second special symbol.

Step S49: Then, the main control CPU 72 executes the effect command output setting process regarding the second special symbol. As a result, a special figure destination determination production command, a working memory number increase production command, a start opening winning sound control command, etc. are transmitted to the production control device 124 (memory number notification means) with respect to the second special symbol. Also, after completing the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event processing (FIG. 19).

[Production determination process when acquired]
FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the effect determination process at the time of acquisition. The main control CPU72 executes this acquisition time effect determination process in the previous first special symbol memory update process and second special symbol memory update process (step S37 in FIG. 20, step S46 in FIG. 21) (preliminary determination means, prefetch processing execution means). As described above, this processing includes the first special symbol (when the ball enters the starting device middle starting winning port 452 or the starting device right starting winning port 450), the second special symbol (when the ball enters the variable starting winning device 28). ) is executed for each of the Therefore, the following description may correspond to the processing related to the first special symbol or the processing related to the second special symbol. The contents of the processing will be described below along each procedure.

Step S50: The main control CPU 72 sets the lower byte (for example, "00H") of the special figure destination determination effect command (first determination information). Note that the byte data set here represents the standard value of the command (at the time of failure).

Step S52: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the big hit determination random number as the first judgment random number. The random number loaded here is stored in the RAM 76 in the previous first special symbol memory update process (step S35 in FIG. 20) or second special symbol memory update process (step S45 in FIG. 21). .

Step S54: Then, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the loaded random number is outside the winning value range (here, below the lower limit value) (lottery result destination determination means, prior determination means). Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets a comparison value (lower limit) in the A register and subtracts the loaded random number from this comparison value. Incidentally, the comparison value (lower limit value) is defined in advance according to the jackpot probability of the special symbol lottery in the pachinko machine 1 . Next, the main control CPU 72 determines whether the calculation result is 0 or a positive value, for example, from the value of the flag register. As a result, if the loaded random number is out of the hit value range (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S80.

Step S80: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the fluctuation pattern information pre-determination process at the time of deviation (variation pattern first determination means, pre-reading process execution means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates a variation pattern first determination command (prefetch information) for the variation time at the time of deviation. The fluctuation pattern destination determination command generated here reflects prior judgment information regarding the fluctuation time (or fluctuation pattern number) especially at the time of operation of the "time reduction function". For example, if the current state is the time of operation of the "time reduction function", the main control CPU 72 is based on the loaded reach determination random number, and the fluctuation time corresponds to "loss reach fluctuation (non-shortened fluctuation time)". determine whether there is As a result, when the fluctuation time corresponds to "missing reach fluctuation (non-shortened fluctuation time)", the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to "non-shortened fluctuation time". In addition, in the case of reach fluctuation, it is also possible to determine "reach group (type of reach)" from the reach mode random number and generate a fluctuation pattern destination determination command from the result. On the other hand, if the fluctuation time does not correspond to the "missing reach fluctuation (non-shortened fluctuation time)", the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the "time reduction medium reduction fluctuation time". Alternatively, if the current state is when the "time reduction function" is not in operation (low probability state), the main control CPU 72 is based on the loaded reach determination random number, and the fluctuation time corresponds to "normal deviation reach fluctuation" Determine whether or not As a result, when the fluctuation time corresponds to the "normal deviation reach fluctuation", the main control CPU72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the "normal deviation reach fluctuation time". On the other hand, if the fluctuation time does not correspond to the "usual deviation reach fluctuation", the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the "normal deviation fluctuation time". Further, the variation pattern destination determination command generated here is set in the transmission buffer in the effect command output setting process (steps S39 and S49). In this process, the main control CPU 72 may generate a variation pattern destination determination command for the variation pattern at the time of the small hit, similarly to the process at the time of loss described above.

When the above procedure is executed, the main control CPU 72 ends the effect determination process at the time of acquisition, and returns to the caller's first special symbol memory update process (FIG. 20) or second special symbol memory update process (FIG. 21). On the other hand, if the loaded random number is not out of the hit value range but within the hit value range (step S54: No), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S74.

Step S74: The main control CPU72 executes a jackpot symbol type determination process. This processing is for judging the jackpot type (winning type) at that time based on the jackpot design random number paired with the jackpot determination random number. For example, the main control CPU 72 loads the jackpot symbol random number for each symbol stored in the previous first special symbol memory update process (step S35 in FIG. 20) or the second special symbol memory update process (step S45 in FIG. 21). Then, similar to step S54, calculation using the comparison value is executed, and from the result, it is determined which winning symbol corresponds. The main control CPU 72 stores the determination result at this time as a special symbol destination determination value, and proceeds to the next step S78.

Step S78: The main control CPU72 sets the special symbol destination determination value stored in the previous step S74 as the lower byte of the special symbol destination determination effect command. For example, the special symbol destination determination value is set to "00H" when "a symbol that does not shift to the time reduction state" is set, and "01H" is set when it corresponds to a "symbol that shifts to the time reduction state". . In any case, by setting the lower byte data here, the standard lower byte data "00H" set in the previous step S50 is rewritten.

Step S79: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a big hit time variation pattern information pre-determination process (variation pattern first determination means, pre-reading process execution means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates the above-described variation pattern destination determination command for the variation time at the time of the big hit. In the variation pattern destination determination command generated here, prior determination information regarding, for example, the reach variation time (or variation pattern number) at the time of the big hit is reflected. Further, the variation pattern destination determination command generated here is set in the transmission buffer in the effect command output setting process (steps S39 and S49).

After completing the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 returns to the first special symbol memory update process (FIG. 20) or the second special symbol memory update process (FIG. 21).

[Special symbol game processing]
Next, the details of the special symbol game process executed in the interrupt management process (FIG. 18) will be described. FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing a configuration example of special symbol game processing. The special symbol game processing includes execution selection processing (step S1000), special symbol variation preprocessing (step S2000), special symbol variation during processing (step S3000), special symbol stop display processing (step S4000), and variable winning device management processing. This configuration includes a group of subroutines (program modules) of (step S5000). Here, first, the basic flow of the special symbol game process will be described along each process.

Step S1000: In the execution selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (one of steps S2000 to S5000) from the "jump table". For example, the main control CPU 72 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the address of the jump destination, and sets the end of the special symbol game process in the stack pointer as the address of the return destination.

Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far (special symbol game management status). For example, if the special symbols have not yet started variable display (special symbol game management status: 00H), the main control CPU 72 selects special symbol variation pre-processing (step S2000) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the special symbol variation preprocessing has already been completed (special symbol game management status: 01H), the main control CPU 72 selects the special symbol variation process (step S3000) as the next jump destination, and special symbol variation is in progress. If the process is completed (special symbol game management status: 02H), the special symbol stop display process (step S4000) is selected as the next jump destination. In this embodiment, the jump destination address is specified in the "jump table" to select the process. There are also known programming examples in which the CPU selects which process to execute next. In such a programming example, the CPU calls each process, and at the beginning step, it refers to the flags one by one and performs conditional branching (continuation/return). There is no need for the CPU 72 to call each process one by one.

Step S2000: In the special symbol variation preprocessing, the main control CPU72 performs the work of preparing the conditions for starting the variation display of the special symbols. The specific contents of the processing will be described later using another flowchart.

Step S3000: In the special symbol fluctuation process, the main control CPU72 performs drive control of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 while counting the variation timer. Specifically, an ON or OFF drive signal (1-byte data) is output to each segment and dot (numbers 0 to 7) of the 7-segment LED. The pattern of the drive signal changes with the passage of time, and thereby the variable display of the special symbols is performed.

Step S4000: In the special symbol stop display process, the main control CPU72 performs drive control of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35. In this case as well, an ON or OFF drive signal is output to each segment and dot of the 7-segment LED, but the pattern of the drive signal is constant, so that the special symbol is stopped and displayed.

Step S5000: The variable winning device management process is selected when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of a big win or a small win (a form other than non-winning) in the previous special symbol stop display process. A big hit game or a small hit game is started according to the mode in which the special symbols are stopped and displayed.

[Jackpot game]
For example, when the special symbols are stopped and displayed in a three-round jackpot mode, a jackpot game (a special game advantageous to the player) is executed. During the jackpot game, the jump destination is set to the variable winning device management process in the previous execution selection process (step S1000), and the variable display of the special symbols is not performed. In the variable winning device management process, the first big winning opening solenoid 90 is energized for a predetermined time (for example, 29 seconds or until 10 winnings are counted) for a preset number of continuous operations (for example, 3 times). , the first variable winning device 30 opens and closes in a determined pattern (continuous operation of the special electric accessory). During this time, the game balls are focused on the first variable prize winning device 30, thereby giving the player an opportunity to win a large number of prize balls (special game executing means). The opening and closing operation of the first variable prize winning device 30 at the time of a big win is called "round", and if the number of consecutive operations is three times in total, these are sometimes collectively called "three rounds". In this embodiment, a plurality of winning types (winning symbols) are provided for the 3-round jackpot. As types of big wins, not only 3-round big wins but also other rounds of big wins may be provided.

In addition, when the main control CPU 72 sets the large winning opening opening pattern (the number of rounds, the number of opening and closing operations per round, the opening time, etc.) in the variable winning device management process, the opening and closing of the first variable winning device 30 for one round The value of the round number counter is incremented by 1 each time the operation is completed. The value of the round number counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 76 with an initial value of 0, for example. Also, the main control CPU 72 generates a round number command representing the value of the round number counter. The round number command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212 in FIG. 18). When the value of the round number counter reaches the set number of continuous operations, the main control CPU 72 ends the big win game (big role) for that round only.

Then, when the big hit game is finished, the main control CPU 72 changes the state (time shortening state) after the jackpot game is finished based on the game state flag (time shortening function operation flag) (time shortening state transition means). In the "time reduction state", the time reduction function is activated, the lottery probability of the normal pattern operation lottery is set from normal probability (low probability) to high probability, and the fluctuation time of the normal pattern is shortened and the variable start prize The opening time of the device 28 is extended and the number of times of opening is increased (so-called electric chew support is performed). On the other hand, in the "non-time reduction state (predetermined game state)", the main control CPU72 does not operate the time reduction function (because the so-called electric chew support is not performed), so the lottery trigger for the first special symbol lottery (the The lottery opportunity (second lottery opportunity) of the second special symbol lottery different from the lottery opportunity (1 lottery opportunity) can be made less likely to occur than the lottery opportunity of the first special symbol lottery (difficult means). In addition, a game machine that includes the elements of a so-called 2-type game machine (for example, a 1-type 2-type mixing machine or a 2-type game machine, that is, a jackpot game is executed by passing a game ball through a specific area during a small win game. In the game machine), the winning probability of the normal symbol operation lottery may not be shifted to the high probability state. In this case, the probability of winning the operation lottery of normal symbols is set to a fixed probability (for example, approximately 1/1) regardless of whether or not the time reduction function is operated, and the opening pattern of the variable start-up prize device 28 makes it easy to win a prize. Difficulty can be adjusted.

By executing such a process, the main control CPU 72, when the jackpot execution condition is satisfied (when the predetermined transition condition is satisfied, the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode), the normal game state It is possible to shift from (first state) to a jackpot game state (second state) different from the normal game state (state transition means).

[small hit]
In addition, in this embodiment, a small win is provided as a winning type other than non-winning. When a small win is won, a small win game is played separately from the big win game, and the second variable winning device 31 opens and closes (special game executing means). For example, when the special symbols are stopped and displayed in a small winning mode, a small winning game (a special game advantageous to the player) is executed. During the small winning game, the jump destination is set to the variable winning device management process in the previous execution selection process (step S1000), and the variable display of the special symbol is not performed. In the variable winning device management process, the second big winning opening solenoid 97 operates for a certain period of time (for example, 1.8 seconds or until 10 winnings are counted) for a preset number of times (for example, once or multiple times). It is excited, and thereby the second variable winning device 31 opens and closes in a determined pattern (operation of special electric accessory). During this time, the player is given an opportunity to win a certain amount of prize balls by intensively winning the game balls to the second variable prize winning device 31 (special game execution means).

In addition, in the variable winning device management process during the small winning game, the specific area solenoid 99 is energized for a certain period of time (for example, 1.6 seconds) for a preset number of times (for example, once). The slide member 31c opens and closes in a predetermined pattern. By allowing the game ball to pass through the specific area 31x during this period, the player is given an opportunity to start a big hit game. That is, whether or not the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small winning game determines whether or not to start the big winning game in the variable winning device management process. In this embodiment, a plurality of winning types (winning symbols) are provided for small wins, and when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x, a big win game corresponding to the winning type is started.

Also, even if the game with a small hit ends without the game ball passing through the specific area 31x, the "time reduction function" does not operate, so the benefit of shifting to the "time reduction state" is not given (for that reason is not a prerequisite for ). It should be noted that when a small win is won in the "time shortened state", the "time shortened state" may end after the small win game ends.

[Multiple winning types]
In this embodiment, as a plurality of winning types, "2-round big win", "3-round big win 1, 2", "4-round big win", "7-round big win", and "10-round big win" are provided. "2-round big win" and "3-round big win 1, 2" are started when special symbols are stopped and displayed in the form of a big win, while "4-round big win", "7-round big win" and "10-round big win" are started. ” is started when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a small win mode and the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small win game. In addition, the second variable winning device 31 operates in the first round among the "4 rounds big win", "7 rounds big win" and "10 rounds big win", and the first variable winning device 30 operates in the remaining rounds.

The winning type corresponds to the type of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is stop-displayed at the time of winning. For example, "3 round jackpot 1" corresponds to the "first winning pattern" jackpot, "3 round jackpot 2" corresponds to the "second winning pattern" jackpot, and "2 round jackpot" corresponds to the "third winning pattern". It corresponds to the jackpot of "symbol". In addition, the "10th round big hit" corresponds to the "fourth winning pattern" small win (big hit when passing through the specific area 31x), and the "7th round big win" corresponds to the "fifth winning pattern" small win (passing through the specific area 31x). The "4-round big win" corresponds to the "6th winning symbol" small win (big win when passing through the specific area 31x). For this reason, hereinafter, the "winning type" is appropriately referred to as "winning design".

[1st winning pattern]
In the special symbol stop display process, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of the "first winning symbol", a big win game is executed (special game executing means). In this case, the first big winning hole 30b is opened once for a sufficiently long time (for example, the maximum opening time is 29.0 seconds) from the first round, and this continues until the third round. Therefore, the jackpot game of the "first winning symbol" is a jackpot game capable of awarding the player with three rounds worth of balls (prize balls). In addition, the first big winning opening 30b is closed without waiting for the longest opening time to elapse when a predetermined number of winnings (for example, 10 times = 10 game balls) occur within one round (the same applies hereinafter). . In this case, by activating the "time shortening function" after the end of the jackpot game, it shifts to the "time shortening state" (the number of times of time saving = 6 times).

[Second winning pattern]
In the special symbol stop display process, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of the "second winning symbol", a big win game is executed (special game executing means). In this case, the first big winning hole 30b is opened once for a sufficiently long time (for example, the maximum opening time is 29.0 seconds) from the first round, and this continues until the third round. Therefore, the jackpot game of the "second winning symbol" is a jackpot game capable of awarding the player with three rounds worth of balls (prize balls). In this case, by activating the "time shortening function" after the end of the jackpot game, it shifts to the "time shortening state" (the number of times of time saving = 100 times).

[3rd winning design]
In the special symbol stop display process, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of the "third winning symbol", a big win game is executed (special game executing means). In this case, the opening of the first big winning hole 30b is performed once for a sufficiently long time (for example, an opening time of up to 29.0 seconds) from the first round, and this continues until the second round. Therefore, the jackpot game of the "third winning symbol" is a jackpot game capable of providing the player with two rounds worth of balls (prize balls). In this case, by activating the "time shortening function" after the end of the jackpot game, it shifts to the "time shortening state" (the number of times of time saving = 100 times).

[4th winning design]
In the special symbol stop display process, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of the "fourth winning symbol", a small winning game is executed, and when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small winning game, The small winning game state is shifted to the big winning game state. In this case, from the second round, the first big winning hole 30b is opened once for a sufficiently long time (for example, an opening time of 29.0 seconds at the longest), and this continues until the tenth round. Therefore, in the jackpot game when the "fourth winning symbol" is obtained, it is possible to provide the player with 9 rounds worth of balls (prize balls). In this case, by activating the "time shortening function" after the end of the jackpot game, it shifts to the "time shortening state" (the number of times of time saving = 6 times).

[5th winning design]
In the special symbol stop display processing, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of the "fifth winning symbol", a small winning game is executed, and when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small winning game, The small winning game state is shifted to the big winning game state. In this case, from the second round, the first big winning hole 30b is opened once for a sufficiently long time (for example, an opening time of 29.0 seconds at the longest), and this continues until the seventh round. Therefore, in the jackpot game when the "fifth winning symbol" is applied, it is possible to provide the player with balls (prize balls) for six rounds. In this case, by activating the "time shortening function" after the end of the jackpot game, it shifts to the "time shortening state" (the number of times of time saving = 6 times).

[6th winning design]
In the special symbol stop display processing, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of the "sixth winning symbol", a small winning game is executed, and when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small winning game, The small winning game state is shifted to the big winning game state. In this case, from the second round, the first big winning hole 30b is opened once for a sufficiently long time (for example, the longest opening time is 29.0 seconds), and this continues until the fourth round. Therefore, in the jackpot game when the "sixth winning symbol" is applied, it is possible to provide the player with balls (prize balls) for three rounds. In this case, by activating the "time shortening function" after the end of the jackpot game, it shifts to the "time shortening state" (the number of times of time saving = 6 times).

As described above, in the present embodiment, regardless of which symbol is selected, after the jackpot game ends, the game shifts to the "time shortening state". It should be noted that only some winning symbols among a plurality of winning symbols may be shifted to the "time reduction state".

In this way, when a small win is won in the internal lottery and the game ball passes through the specific area during the small win game, the big win game is executed, and after the big win game is completed, the time is shifted to a shortened state according to the type of the winning pattern. The game machine is called a so-called one-type two-type game machine.

In this way, when the game ball is shot into the left-handed area (first area) and hits the jackpot (predetermined first winning), the main control CPU 72 makes it possible to execute the jackpot game (first game) ( first game executing means).

In addition, when the game ball is shot into the right-handed area (second area) and corresponds to a small hit (predetermined second winning), the main control CPU 72 will play a small hit game that may lead to a big hit game (second game) can be executed (second game executing means).

Furthermore, when the game ball is shot into the left-handed region (first region) and hits 2 winning symbols (predetermined third winning) in the normal symbol lottery, the main control CPU 72 The open game (third game) of the variable starting prize winning device 28 that may correspond to the second win) can be executed (third game executing means).

[Special symbol change preprocessing]
FIG. 24 is a flow chart showing a procedure example of special symbol variation preprocessing. Each procedure will be described below.

Step S2100: First, the main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the first special symbol working memory number or the second special symbol working memory number remains (greater than 0). This confirmation can be performed by referring to the value of the working memory number counter stored in the RAM 76 . When the working memory numbers of both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the demonstration setting process of step S2500.

Step S2500: In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates a demonstration effect command. The demonstration effect command is output to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212 in FIG. 18). When the demonstration setting process is executed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process. When returning, it returns to the end address as described above (same hereafter).

On the other hand, if the value of the working memory number counter of either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is greater than 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S2200.

Step S2200: The main control CPU 72 executes special symbol storage area shift processing (second lottery priority execution means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 preferentially reads out the lottery random numbers (jackpot decision random numbers, jackpot pattern random numbers, etc.) stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76 that correspond to the second special pattern (so-called priority digestion). At this time, if random numbers are stored in two or more sections (only the first special symbol applies), the main control CPU 72 reads and erases (consumes) the random numbers in order from the first section, and then changes the remaining random numbers to 1. Move (shift) to the previous section one by one. The read random number is saved, for example, in another temporary storage area. When the random number corresponding to the second special symbol is not stored, the main control CPU72 reads the random number corresponding to the first special symbol and stores it in the temporary storage area. Each random number stored in the temporary storage area is used for internal lottery in the next big hit determination process. As a result, in this embodiment, the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially performed over the first special symbol. It should be noted that it is also possible to employ a control in which random numbers are simply read out in the order in which they are stored without providing such a priority order for each special symbol (so-called order digestion). Also, in this process, the main control CPU72 subtracts one from the value of the working memory number counter (the first special symbol or the second special symbol, whichever shifted the random number) stored in the RAM76, and subtracts The latter value is set as the "number of working memories at the start of fluctuation". As a result, the display mode of the number of memories by the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a or the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a changes (decrease by 1) in the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 18). . After completing the procedure up to this point, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S2300.

[Special symbol storage area shift process]
FIG. 25 is a flow chart showing a procedure example of the special symbol storage area shift process. In the previous special symbol variation pre-processing, if the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol is greater than "0" (step S2100 in FIG. 24: Yes), the main control CPU72 executes this special symbol storage area shift process. Each procedure will be described below.

Step S2210: The main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the working memory corresponding to the second special symbol remains. This confirmation can be performed by referring to the value of the second special symbol working memory number counter stored in the RAM76. If the value of the working memory number counter corresponding to the second special symbol is 1 or more (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S2212.

Step S2212: The main control CPU 72 designates the second special symbol as the special symbol to shift the storage area. This designation is performed by setting, for example, "02H" as the target symbol designation value.

Step S2214: On the other hand, if the value of the working memory number counter corresponding to the second special symbol is 0 (step S2210: No), the main control CPU72 designates the first special symbol as the special symbol to shift the storage area. do. The designation in this case is performed, for example, by setting "01H" as the target symbol designation value.

Step S2216: The main control CPU72 shifts the random number storage area of the RAM76 for the target special symbol specified in either step S2212 or step S2214. It should be noted that the specific contents of the processing are as already described in the previous special symbol variation preprocessing.

Step S2218: Next, the main control CPU72 subtracts the value of the working memory counter for the target special symbol. For example, if the object to shift the memory area this time is the second special symbol, the main control CPU72 subtracts (-1) the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the second special symbol.

Step S2220: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the "variation start working memory number" from the value of the working memory counter after the subtraction. In addition, here, for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, after adding the value of the working memory counter, the "number of working memories at the start of fluctuation" may be set.

Step S2222: In addition, the main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the special symbol for which the storage area of this time is to be shifted is the second special symbol.
Step S2224: If the target is the second special symbol (step S2222: Yes), the main control CPU72 sets the effect command when the working memory number is reduced with respect to the second special symbol. The effect command set here is also generated as a command of one word length, but its structure is in contrast to the above-described "effect command at the time of working memory increase". That is, the working memory number decrease effect command is a value of the lower byte (eg, "00H" to "03H") representing the number of working memories after the decrease with respect to the preceding value (eg, "BCH") of the upper byte representing the command type. ”) is added, and an additional value (for example, “10H”) meaning “decrease in the number of working memories accompanying consumption” is added (logical sum) to the value of the lower byte. Therefore, for the lower byte, the addition value "10H" is logically summed, and the second digit becomes "1". become a thing. In other words, if the lower byte of the command is "13H", it means that the number of working memories up to the previous time "4" (the command notation is "14H") has decreased by one, resulting in the current number of working memories being "3" (command The notation indicates that it has become "13H"). Similarly, if the lower byte is "12H" to "10H", it is the result that the number of working memories "3" to "1" (command notation is "13H" to "11H") has decreased by one. , indicates that the current number of working memories is "2" to "0" (command notation is "12H" to "10H"). It should be noted that the preceding value "BCH" is a value indicating that the current effect command is the working memory number command for the second special symbol.

Step S2226: In addition, when the object of this time is the first special symbol (step S2222: No), the main control CPU 72 sets the production command when the working memory number is reduced with respect to the first special symbol. The command in this case is the same as above except that the preceding value is a value (for example, "BBH") indicating that it is a working memory number command for the first special symbol.

Step S2228: Then, the main control CPU 72 executes effect command output processing. This processing is for transmitting to the effect control device 124 the effect command set at the previous step S2224 or step S2226 (storage number notifying means).
After completing the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol variation pre-processing (FIG. 24).

[See Figure 24: Special symbol variation pre-processing]
Step S2300: The main control CPU 72 executes big hit determination processing (internal lottery). In this process, the main control CPU 72 first sets the range of jackpot values, and determines whether or not the read random number value is included in this range (first lottery execution means, second lottery execution means, lottery execution means). means). If the random number value read at this time is included in the jackpot value range, the main control CPU 72 sets the jackpot flag (01H) and then proceeds to step S2400.

In this way, the main control CPU72, when the lottery trigger (first lottery trigger) of the first special symbol lottery occurs (when the game ball enters the start winning opening corresponding to the first special symbol), the first special symbol A lottery (first lottery) is executed (first lottery execution means), and in a non-time shortening state (predetermined game state), a lottery opportunity of a second special symbol that is less likely to occur than the lottery opportunity of the first special symbol lottery ( When a second lottery opportunity) occurs, a second special symbol lottery (second lottery) is executed (second lottery executing means).

If the big hit flag is not set, the main control CPU 72 next sets a range of small hit values in the same big hit determination process, and determines whether the read random number value is included in this range (first lottery execution means, second lottery execution means, lottery execution means). The "minor win" referred to here is anything other than non-winning (lose), but has a different nature from the "big win". In other words, the "big hit" generates an opportunity (game turning point) for shifting to the "time shortening state", but the "minor win" does not generate such an opportunity. A "minor hit" is positioned as satisfying the condition for activating only the second variable winning device 31 (the condition for activating the condition device is not satisfied). Furthermore, when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the "small hit", it is positioned as a development to the "big hit" (the conditions for operating the condition device are satisfied). In any case, if the read random number is included in the range of the small hit value, the main control CPU72 sets the small hit flag, and then proceeds to step S2400. Thus, in this embodiment, the range of the big hit value and the small hit value is defined in advance as the hit range other than the non-winning, but the big hit determination table and the small hit determination table for each state are prepared in advance. Each of them may be written in the ROM 74, read out, and compared with the random number to determine the big hit.

In this embodiment, in the first special symbol lottery, the winning probability of the big win is set to 1/319, and the small win is not set. In addition, in the second special symbol lottery, the probability of winning the big win is set to the same 1/319, and the probability of winning the small win is set to 1/6. Therefore, in the second special symbol lottery, it is easier to win a small win than a big win. In order to satisfy the probability of winning the big hit and the probability of winning the small win, the main control CPU 72 sets the range of the big win value and the range of the small win value and compares them with the read random numbers.

Step S2400: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the big hit flag has been set to the value (01H) in the previous big hit determination process. If the jackpot flag is not set to the value (01H) (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S2402.

Step S2402: The main control CPU72 determines whether or not the value (01H) has been set to the small hit flag in the previous big hit determination process. If the small hit flag is not set to the value (01H) (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S2404. In addition, the main control CPU 72 may determine a big hit (for example, set 01H) or a small hit (for example, set 0AH) by the value of the common hit flag without separately preparing the big hit flag and the small hit flag.

Step S2404: The main control CPU 72 executes stop symbol determination processing when losing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets stop symbol number data at the time of loss by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 . Also, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command and a lottery result command (when lost) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124 . These commands are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212 in FIG. 18).

In addition, in this embodiment, since 7-segment LEDs are used for the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35, for example, the display mode of the stop symbol at the time of loss is always one segment (center The stop symbol number data can be fixed to one value (for example, 64H) with only the lighting display of the bar "-"). In this case, the storage capacity used on the program can be reduced, the processing load on the main control CPU 72 can be reduced, and the processing speed can be improved.

Step S2405: Next, the main control CPU 72 refers to a variation pattern selection table (variation pattern defining means) (not shown) and executes variation pattern determination processing at the time of deviation (variation pattern determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the variation pattern number at the time of loss for the special symbol (variation pattern selection means). The variation pattern number distinguishes the type (pattern) of the variation display of the special symbol, or corresponds to the variation time required for the variation display. Variation patterns include various variation patterns such as normal variation (non-reach variation), reach variation, super reach variation, etc. (same applies to big wins and small wins). The information about the variation pattern of the selected special symbol is transmitted to the effect control device as a variation pattern command including information as to whether or not it is a special variation (the same is true for the big hit and the small hit). ).

Here, since the fluctuation time at the time of loss differs depending on whether it is the above-mentioned "time reduction state" or not, the main control CPU72 loads the game state flag in this process, and the current state is "time reduction status”. Also, even if it is not in the "time shortening state", the fluctuation time at the time of failure is set in step S2200, for example, "the number of working memories at the start of fluctuation display (0 to 3)" (For example, the number of working memories at the start of variable display: 0 → about 12.5 seconds, the number of working memories at the start of variable display: 1 → about 8 seconds, the number of working memories at the start of variable display 2 pieces → about 5 seconds, the number of working memories at the start of the fluctuation display 3 pieces → about 2.5 seconds). It should be noted that the stop display time of the symbol at the time of loss is constant (for example, about 0.5 seconds) regardless of the variation pattern. Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the determined variable time (at the time of loss) to the variable timer, and also sets the value of the stop display time at the time of loss to the stop symbol display timer.

Variation patterns include various variation patterns such as non-reach variation patterns, reach variation patterns, super reach variation patterns, etc. The variation pattern selection table may have different table contents according to the number of working memories at the start of variation, or may have common table contents regardless of the number of working memories at the start of variation, and a table corresponding to the winning type at the time of winning. It may be the content.

Here, the length of the set fluctuation time differs greatly between the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern. That is, the "non-reach fluctuation pattern" basically corresponds to a short fluctuation time (for example, about 3.0 seconds to 29.0 seconds depending on the number of working memories at the start of fluctuation), whereas the "reach fluctuation "Pattern" corresponds to a longer variation time (for example, about 30.0 seconds to 150.0 seconds).

The variation pattern may be a variation pattern in which a pseudo continuation announcement effect (pseudo continuation) is executed. The pseudo-continuous advance notice effect is a effect in which the effect symbol is simulated to change once or more times during one change of the special symbol.

Here, the pseudo 1 variation (pseudo 1: first pseudo variation) is a variation in which the pseudo variation of the production pattern is executed once, and the pseudo 2 variation (pseudo 2: second pseudo variation Pseudo variation) is a variation in which a pseudo variation of the production pattern is executed twice. In addition, the pseudo 3 variation (pseudo 3: third pseudo variation) is a variation in which the pseudo variation of the production pattern is executed three times, and the pseudo 4 variation (pseudo 4: fourth pseudo Variation) is a variation in which a pseudo variation of the effect pattern is executed four times.

The above steps S2404 and S2405 are control procedures when the big hit determination result is lost (other than non-winning), but when the determination result is a big hit (step S2400: Yes) or a small hit (step S2402: Yes) , the main control CPU 72 executes the following procedure. First, the case of a big hit will be described.

Step S2410: The main control CPU 72 executes a jackpot stop symbol determination process (winning type determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of the current winning symbol (stop symbol number at the time of the big hit) for each special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) based on the big hit symbol random number. The relationship between the jackpot symbol random number value and the type of winning symbol is defined in advance in a special symbol determination data table (winning type defining means). Therefore, the main control CPU 72 can refer to the big-hit stop symbol selection table in the big-hit stop symbol determination process, and can determine the type of the winning symbol based on the big-hit symbol random number from the stored contents.

[Winning pattern at the time of the big hit]
In this embodiment, three types of winning symbols are prepared as winning symbols selectively determined at the time of a big win. The breakdown regarding the first special design is "first winning design" or "second winning design", and the breakdown regarding the second special design is only "third winning design". Each of these winning symbols may further include a plurality of winning symbols. For example, in the case of "first winning design", "first winning design A", "first winning design B", "first winning design C", and so on.

Further, in the present embodiment, the selection ratio of winning symbols selected at the time of a big hit in the internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol is different. Therefore, the main control CPU 72 distinguishes the winning symbols to be selected depending on whether the result of this big hit corresponds to the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

[Stop symbol selection table at the time of the first special symbol jackpot]
FIG. 26 is a diagram showing the configuration columns of the first special symbol jackpot time stop symbol selection table. When the result of this big win corresponds to the first special symbol, the main control CPU 72 refers to this first special symbol big win stop symbol selection table (winning kind defining means) to determine the kind of winning symbol.

In the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the left column shows the allocation values for each winning symbol. Equivalent to. In addition, the second column from the left shows "first winning symbol" and "second winning symbol" corresponding to each distribution value. That is, when the jackpot corresponding to the first special symbol is selected, the ratio of selecting the "first winning symbol" is 99/100 (=99%), and the percentage of selecting the "second winning symbol" is 100%. is 1 (=1%) of The magnitude of each distribution value corresponds to the selection ratio for each winning symbol using the jackpot symbol random number.

In any case, when the result of this big hit corresponds to the first special symbol, the main control CPU 72 performs a selection lottery based on the big hit symbol random number, and the selection ratio shown in the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table. to selectively determine winning patterns. In the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, as shown in the third column from the left, 2-byte command data, for example, is defined as a winning stop symbol command. The stop symbol command is described, for example, as a combination of MODE value and EVENT value, of which the upper byte MODE value "B1H" indicates that the current winning symbol was selected when the first special symbol was a big hit. represents. Also, the EVENT values "01H" and "02H" in the lower bytes represent the types of corresponding winning symbols in the selection table. For this reason, for example, if the result of the big hit this time corresponds to the first special symbol and the "first winning symbol" is selected as the winning symbol, the stop symbol command at the time of winning is described as "B1H01H". It will be.

As described above, when the main control CPU 72 selects a winning symbol from the stop symbol selection table for the first special symbol jackpot, it generates a stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to the effect control device 124, for example, in the above effect control output process. In addition, the main control CPU 72 determines the jackpot stop symbol number for the first special symbol based on the selected winning symbol.

[Time saving number of times]
The column on the right side of the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table shows the value of the number of time reductions given after the jackpot game ends. In this embodiment, when it corresponds to the "first winning pattern", regardless of whether it is during normal (non-time reduction state) or during time reduction (time reduction state), the number of times of time reduction is 6 times (or 10 times ) is granted.

In addition, when it corresponds to the "second winning design", regardless of whether it is normal or during time saving, the number of time saving times is given 100 times (or 104 times). The number of times of time saving is not limited to the above value, and may be 1 to 5 times, or may be 7 times or more (11 times or more).

Here, "6 times (or 10 times)" means that the total number of variations of the second special symbol is 6 times, or the total number of variations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 10 times. It means that the shortened state ends.

In addition, "100 times (or 104 times)" means that the total number of variations of the second special symbol is 100 times, or the total number of variations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 104 times, shortening the time It means that the state is finished.

[Stop symbol selection table at the time of the second special symbol jackpot]
FIG. 27 is a diagram showing the configuration columns of the second special symbol jackpot time stop symbol selection table. The main control CPU 72, when the result of this big win corresponds to the second special symbol, determines the kind of the winning symbol by referring to this second special symbol big win stopping symbol selection table (winning kind defining means).

In the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the left column shows distribution values for each winning symbol, and each distribution value "100" corresponds to the ratio when the denominator is 100. . Similarly, the second column from the left shows the "third winning symbol" corresponding to each distribution value. That is, at the time of the big hit corresponding to the second special symbol, the ratio of selecting the "third winning symbol" is 100/100 (=100%).

When the result of the current jackpot corresponds to the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 performs a selection lottery based on the jackpot symbol random number, and selects the winning symbol at the selection ratio shown in the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. to decide Similarly, in the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, as shown in the third column from the left, 2-byte command data, for example, is defined as a winning stop symbol command. Here too, the stop symbol command is described as a combination of the above MODE value and EVENT value, of which the upper byte MODE value "B2H" is selected when the winning symbol of this time hits the second special symbol. It means that Also, the EVENT value "01H" in the lower byte represents the type of winning symbol corresponding in the selection table. For this reason, for example, if the result of the big hit this time corresponds to the second special symbol and the "third winning symbol" is selected as the winning symbol, the stop symbol command will be described as "B2H01H". .

As described above, when the main control CPU 72 selects a winning symbol from the second special symbol jackpot time stop symbol selection table, it generates a stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to the effect control device 124, for example, in the above effect control output process. In addition, the main control CPU 72 determines the jackpot stop symbol number for the second special symbol based on the selected winning symbol.

[Time saving number of times]
In the column on the right side of the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the value of the number of time reductions to be given after the jackpot game is finished is shown. In this embodiment, when the "third winning pattern" is met, the number of times of time saving is given 100 times (or 104 times) regardless of whether it is during normal time or during time saving.

[See Figure 24: Special symbol variation pre-processing]
Step S2412: Next, the main control CPU 72 refers to the variation pattern selection table (variation pattern defining means) and executes the variation pattern determination process at the time of the big hit (variation pattern determination means). In this process, the main control CPU72 determines the variation pattern (variation time and stop display time) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol based on the variation pattern determination random number shifted in the previous step S2200. Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the determined variable time to the variable timer, and also sets the value of the stop display time to the stop symbol display timer. Generally, in the case of jackpot reach variation, a longer variation time than when losing is determined.

Step S2414: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes other setting processing at the time of the big hit. In this process, if the winning symbol type (jackpot stop symbol number) determined in the previous step S2410 is the "second winning symbol" or "third winning symbol", the main control CPU72 stores the flag area of the RAM76. A time reduction function operation flag as a game state flag is set to ON (01H) (time reduction state transition means, time reduction function operation means). In addition, the main control CPU 72 resets the time reduction function operation flag to OFF (00H) when it corresponds to the "first winning design" in the non-time reduction state, and corresponds to the "first winning design" in the time reduction state. In this case, the value of the time reduction function activation flag is set to ON (01H).

Also, in the process of step S2414, the main control CPU 72 determines the display mode of the stop symbol (jackpot symbol) by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 based on the jackpot stop symbol number. In addition, the main control CPU 72 generates a lottery result command (at the time of the big hit) together with the stop symbol command (at the time of the big hit). These stop symbol commands and lottery result commands are also sent to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

Next, processing at the time of a small hit will be described.
Step S2407: The main control CPU 72 executes a small hit stop symbol determination process (winning type determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of the winning symbol at the time of the small win (stop symbol number at the time of the small win) based on the big hit symbol random number. Here, similarly, the relationship between the big hit symbol random number and the type of the winning symbol at the time of the small win is defined in advance in the stop symbol selection table at the time of the small win (winning type defining means). In the present embodiment, the jackpot symbol random number is used to reduce the load on the main control CPU 72 to determine the winning symbol at the time of the small hit, but a dedicated random number may be used separately. Further, in this embodiment, a small hit is not set for the first special symbol, but is set only for the second special symbol.

[Election design at the time of small hit]
In this embodiment, three types of winning symbols are prepared as winning symbols selectively determined at the time of a small win. The details of the three types are "fourth winning design", "fifth winning design", and "sixth winning design". Incidentally, these winning symbols may further include a plurality of winning symbols. For example, in the case of "fourth winning design", "fourth winning design A", "fourth winning design B", "fourth winning design C", and so on.

[Stop symbol selection table for second special symbol small hit]
FIG. 28 is a diagram showing the configuration columns of the second special symbol small hit stop symbol selection table. The main control CPU 72 determines the type of the winning symbol by referring to this second special symbol small hit time stop symbol selection table (winning type defining means).

Also in the second special symbol small hit stop symbol selection table, the left column shows distribution values by winning symbols, and each distribution value "50", "14", "36" is a denominator. It corresponds to the ratio when it is set to 100. Similarly, the second column from the left shows "fourth winning design", "fifth winning design", and "sixth winning design" corresponding to each distribution value. That is, at the time of the small hit corresponding to the second special symbol, the ratio of selecting the "fourth winning symbol" is 50/100 (=50%), and the percentage of selecting the "fifth winning symbol". is 14/100 (=14%), and the ratio of selecting the "sixth winning symbol" is 36/100 (=36%).

As a result of the small hit this time, the main control CPU 72 performs a selection lottery based on the big hit symbol random number, and selectively determines the winning symbol at the selection ratio shown in the second special symbol small hit stop symbol selection table. In the second special symbol small winning stop symbol selection table, as shown in the third column from the left, 2-byte command data, for example, is defined as a stop symbol command at the time of winning. Here too, the stop symbol command is described as a combination of the above MODE value and EVENT value, of which the upper byte MODE value "B2H" was selected when the current winning symbol was a second special symbol hit. It means that it is something. The EVENT values "02H", "03H", and "04H" of the lower bytes respectively represent the types of winning symbols corresponding in the selection table. For this reason, for example, when the "fourth winning symbol" is selected as the winning symbol as a result of the small win this time, the stop symbol command is described as "B2H02H".

As described above, when the main control CPU 72 selects a winning symbol from the second special symbol small hit stop symbol selection table, it generates a stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to the effect control device 124, for example, in the above effect control output process. In addition, the main control CPU 72 determines the small hit stop symbol number for the second special symbol based on the selected winning symbol.

[Time saving number of times]
In the column on the right side of the second special symbol small winning stop symbol selection table, the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small winning game, the big winning game is started, and the number of times of shortening time given after the big winning game is finished. values are shown. In this embodiment, if it corresponds to the "fourth winning design", "fifth winning design" or "sixth winning design", the number of times of time saving is 6 times (or 10 times) is granted.

By using the stop symbol selection table for the first special symbol big hit, the stop symbol selection table for the second special symbol big hit, and the stop symbol selection table for the second special symbol small hit, the main control CPU 72 is in a non-time reduction state or In the case of "1st to 6th winning symbols" in the time shortening state (4th to 6th winning symbols are limited to when the jackpot game is executed), the time shortening state is entered. A transition condition can be satisfied (transition condition setting means).

[See Figure 24: Special symbol variation pre-processing]
Step S2408: Next, the main control CPU 72 refers to the variation pattern selection table (variation pattern defining means) and executes a small hit variation pattern determination process (variation pattern determination means). In this process, the main control CPU72 determines the variation pattern (variation time and stop display time) of the second special symbol based on the variation pattern determination random number shifted in the previous step S2200 (variation pattern selection means). Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the determined variable time to the variable timer, and sets the value of the stop display time to the stop symbol display timer. In this embodiment, the small hit is set only in the second special symbol lottery, and at the time of the small hit, a variation pattern having a variation time for the small hit is selected. In addition, you may set a small hit to a 1st special design lottery.

Step S2409: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes other setting processing at the time of a small hit. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the display mode of the stop design (small hit design) by the second special design display device 35 based on the small hit stop design number. In addition, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command and a lottery result command (at the time of a small hit) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124 . These stop symbol commands and lottery result commands are also sent to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

Step S2415: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes special symbol variation start processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 selects variation pattern data based on the variation pattern number (when lost/when hit). In addition, the main control CPU 72 sets a special symbol fluctuation start flag in the flag area of the RAM 76 . Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a variation start command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124 . This fluctuation start command is also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the above effect control output process. After finishing the above procedure, the main control CPU72 sets the special symbol fluctuation process (step S3000) as the next jump destination, and returns to the special symbol game process.

[Fig. 23: Processing during special symbol fluctuation, processing during special symbol stop display]
In the special symbol fluctuation processing, as described above, the main control CPU72 loads the value of the fluctuation timer from the register to the timer counter, and then the timer according to the passage of time (clock pulse count or interrupt counter value) Decrement the value of the counter. Then, the main control CPU 72 refers to the value of the timer counter and controls the variable display of the special symbol as described above until the value becomes zero. Then, when the value of the timer counter becomes 0, the main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol stop display process (step S4000) to the next jump destination.

Also, in the special symbol stop display process, the main control CPU 72 controls the stop display of the special symbol based on the stop symbol determined in the stop symbol determination process (steps S2404, S2407 and S2410 in FIG. 24). Also, the main control CPU 72 generates a symbol stop command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124 . The symbol stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the above effect control output process. When the stop symbol is displayed for a predetermined time during the special symbol stop display process, the main control CPU 72 erases the symbol fluctuation flag.

[Processing for determination of variation pattern at time of failure]
FIG. 29 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a change pattern determination process when losing. Each procedure will be described below.

Step S2460: The main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the current variation is the variation of the first special symbol.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the current variation is the variation of the first special symbol (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S2464. On the other hand, if it is not possible to confirm that the current variation is the variation of the first special symbol (No), that is, if the variation of this time is the variation of the second special symbol, the main control CPU72 executes step S2462.

Step S2462: The main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the value of the number of special fluctuations is greater than zero.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the value of the number of special fluctuations is greater than 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S2466. On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that the value of the number of special fluctuations is greater than 0 (No), that is, if the value of the number of special fluctuations is 0, the main control CPU 72 executes step S2468.

Step S2464: The main control CPU 72 refers to the deviation pattern table for the first special symbol and executes the process of determining the variation pattern of the first special symbol.

The deviation pattern table for the first special symbol includes a table corresponding to the game state (non-time shortening state, time shortening state) and the number of memories, and the main control CPU 72 is based on the game state and the number of memories Accordingly, the variation pattern at the time of loss for the first special symbol is determined.

Step S2466: The main control CPU 72 refers to the special variation pattern table for the second special symbol and executes the process of determining the variation pattern (special variation pattern) of the second special symbol.

The special fluctuation pattern table for the second special symbol includes a table corresponding to the game state (non-time shortening state, time shortening state) and the number of memories, and the main control CPU 72 is the game state and the number of memories , the variation pattern for the second special symbol at the time of loss is determined. For example, in the non-shortening state, a special variation pattern having an extremely short variation time (about 1 second) is selected. On the other hand, in the time shortening state, a special variation pattern having a predetermined variation time (several seconds to several tens of seconds) is selected. Incidentally, when selecting the special variation pattern, the variation pattern may be determined without considering the number of memories.

By executing such processing, the main control CPU72, when the value of the number of special fluctuations is a value greater than 0 (when a predetermined condition is satisfied), the search challenge icon display effect (specific effect) A variation pattern having an impracticable variation time (a variation pattern with a short variation of about several seconds) can be selected (variation pattern selection means).

Step S2468: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of determining the second special symbol variation pattern (predetermined variation pattern) by referring to the normal variation pattern table for the second special symbol at the time of loss.

The normal fluctuation pattern table for the second special symbol includes a table corresponding to the game state (non-time shortening state, time shortening state) and the number of memories, and the main control CPU 72 is the game state and the number of memories Depending on, the variation pattern at the time of loss for the second special symbol is determined. For example, in the non-reduced time state, a normal variation pattern (variation pattern with a long variation of about several tens of seconds) having a longer variation time than the special variation pattern (about 10 seconds, a variation time that can execute the search challenge production) select. On the other hand, in the time shortening state, a normal variation pattern having a predetermined variation time (several seconds to several tens of seconds) is selected. In addition, when all the time shortening states are special variation patterns, the normal variation pattern is not selected in the time shortening state.

After completing the above process, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol variation pre-process (FIG. 24).

[Processing during special symbol stop display]
Next, FIG. 30 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the process during special symbol stop display. Each procedure will be described below.

Step S4100: The main control CPU 72 subtracts the value of the stop symbol display timer (decrements by the interrupt period).

Step S4200: Then, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the stop display time has expired, based on the value of the stop symbol display timer subtracted this time. Specifically, if the value of the stop symbol display timer is not 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 determines that the stop display time has not yet expired (No). In this case, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process, jumps from the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 23) and repeats the special symbol stop display process in the next interrupt cycle.

On the other hand, if the value of the stop symbol display timer is 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 determines that the stop display time has expired (Yes). In this case, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4250.

Step S4250: The main control CPU 72 generates a symbol stop command and a stop display time end command. The symbol stop command and the stop display time end command are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the above effect control output process. Also, the main control CPU 72 erases the symbol-fluctuation flag here. The "stop display time end command" is a command indicating that the stop display time of the special symbols has ended (elapsed).

Step S4300: Here, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the jackpot flag value (01H) is set. If the jackpot flag value (01H) is set (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4350.

[When elected]
Step S4350: The main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination of the jump table to "variable winning device management processing". Note that the main control CPU 72 executes processing for setting various functions to non-operation in this processing. Specifically, the time shortening function is deactivated. As a result, before the special game (big role) is started, the game is shifted to the normal state (non-time reduction state).

When the above procedure is completed at the time of the big hit, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process.

[When not elected]
On the other hand, the following procedure is executed in cases other than the time of the big hit.
That is, when the main control CPU 72 determines that the jackpot flag value (01H) is not set in step S4300 (No), then step S4600 is executed.

Step S4600: The main control CPU72 then checks whether or not the small hit flag value (01H) is set. Then, the value of the small hit flag (01H) is not set, and if it is simply a loss (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4602.

Step S4602: The main control CPU 72 sets the address of the special symbol variation pre-processing as the jump destination address of the jump table.

Step S4605: On the other hand, if the small hit flag value (01H) is set (step S4600: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the address of the variable winning device management process as the jump destination address of the jump table.

Step S4608: The main control CPU 72 executes special fluctuation frequency update processing. In this process, when the number of special fluctuations is 0, no process is executed. On the other hand, if the number of special fluctuations is 1 or more, a process of decrementing (-1) the number of special fluctuations is executed. In addition, regardless of whether the number of special fluctuations is 0 or 1 or more, when this process is executed, the main control CPU 72 sends a special fluctuation number designation command reflecting the value of the number of special fluctuations to the effect control device Send.

Step S4610: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the value of the number cutting counter. As for the "number of cutting counter", the counter value related to the "time reduction state" is set in the time reduction count area of the RAM76. In this embodiment, a so-called time reduction function of cutting times is adopted, and when shifting to the "time reduction state", the first times cutting counter value related to the time reduction state is a predetermined numerical value (for example, 6 times or 100 times) , and the second cut counter value for the shortened time state is set to a predetermined number (eg, 10 times or 104 times). Information on the first cut counter value and the second cut counter value is notified (transmitted) to the effect control device 124 by the cut counter command.
It should be noted that the number-of-times cutting counter value related to the time reduction state is controlled by only one counter value without providing two counter values such as a first number-of-cutting counter value and a second number-of-cutting counter value. good too.

Step S4620: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the loaded counter value (first cut counter value or second cut counter value) is zero. At this time, if the number of cut counter value is already 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process. On the other hand, if the number cut counter value is not 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4630.

Step S4630: The main control CPU 72 decrements (subtracts 1) the first cut counter value and the second cut counter value. Specifically, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, both the first cut counter value and the second cut counter value are decremented, and when the first special pattern is stopped and displayed decrements only the second tick counter value.

Step S4640: Then, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the subtraction result of one of the number-of-times counter values (the first number-of-times counter value or the second number-of-times counter value) is zero. As a result of the subtraction, when none of the number-of-times counter values is 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process. On the other hand, if any of the number cutting counter values are 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S4650.

Step S4650: Here, the main control CPU 72 resets the flag when the multiple cut function is activated. In this embodiment, the number-of-times cutting counter value for the time shortening state is set to a predetermined numerical value (for example, 6 times). Therefore, in the time shortening state 6 times the second special symbol loss variation (if it does not pass through the specific area, including the small hit variation at that time) is executed, the time shortening function operation flag is reset be done. On the other hand, even if the loss fluctuation of the first special symbol is executed six times in the time shortening state, the time shortening function operation flag is not reset, and then four times the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the time shortening state. When an off-variation is performed, the time reduction function activation flag is reset. As a result, the time shortening state ends after the special symbol is stopped and displayed. In addition, the time reduction function activation flag is explained in the example of resetting when the stop display time of the special design has passed, but even if it is reset at the end of the fluctuation time of the special design (before the start of stop display time measurement) good.
And, when the above procedure is finished, it returns to the special symbol game process.

In this way, the end condition (predetermined end condition) of the time shortening state is when the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after shifting to the time shortening state reaches the first number (for example, 6 times), or When the total number of fluctuations obtained by summing the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after shifting to the time shortening state reaches the second number (for example, 10 times) larger than the first number condition is satisfied.

[Display output management processing]
Next, FIG. 31 is a flow chart showing a configuration example of the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 18) executed in the interrupt management process. The display output management process includes a special symbol display setting process (step S1200), a normal symbol display setting process (step S1210), a state display setting process (step S1220), an operation memory display setting process (step S1230), and a continuous operation number display setting. This configuration includes a group of subroutines for processing (step S1240).

Of these, the special symbol display setting process (step S1200), the normal symbol display setting process (step S1210), and the operating memory display setting process (step S1230) are performed by the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 34 as already described. Generate and output a drive signal to be applied to each LED of the symbol display device 35, the normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a and the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a. processing.

The state display setting process (step S1220) and the continuous operation count display setting process (step S1240) are processes for generating and outputting drive signals to be applied to the LEDs of the gaming state display device . First, in the state display setting process, the main control CPU72 controls lighting of the time reduction state display lamp 38e according to the value of the time reduction function operation flag. For example, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, if the value (01H) is set in the time reduction function operation flag, regardless of whether or not the power is turned on, the main control CPU 72 turns on the time reduction status display lamp 38e. A lighting signal is output to the corresponding LED. Furthermore, the main control CPU 72 controls lighting of the firing position designation display lamp 38f according to the special game management status. For example, when the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 is activated by a big win game or a small win game, the main control CPU 72 sends a lighting signal to the LED corresponding to the launch position designation display lamp 38f. Output. In addition, if the value (01H) is set to the time reduction function operation flag, the main control CPU72 in addition to the above time reduction state display lamp 38e, the lighting signal to the LED corresponding to the firing position designation display lamp 38f to output In addition, when the launch position designation display lamp 38f shifts to the "time reduction state" after a big win game, it lights up from the start of the big win game until the "time reduction state" ends, and does not light up when the "time reduction state" ends. (OFF).

In addition, the main control CPU 72 controls lighting of the jackpot type display lamps 38a, 38b, and 38c in the continuous operation count display setting process. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 generates lighting signals (common output data) for the jackpot type display lamps 38a, 38b, and 38c based on the value of the continuous operation count status. At this time, the target for outputting the lighting signal is the combination of the display lamps 38a, 38b, 38c corresponding to the jackpot symbol designated by the value of the number of continuous operation status. For example, if the value of the continuous operation count status specifies "10 rounds", the main control CPU 72 controls the lamps corresponding to the lighting pattern representing "10 rounds" (for example, all the indicator lamps 38a, 38b, 38c lamp) to generate a turn-on signal. Also, if the value of the continuous operation count status specifies "2 rounds", the main control CPU 72 generates a lighting signal for the lamp (for example, only the lamp 38a) corresponding to the lighting pattern representing "2 rounds". . Since the three display lamps 38a, 38b and 38c can display six lighting patterns, it is possible to correspond to the five types of jackpots of the present embodiment. The details of the lighting pattern corresponding to the number of rounds are preferably displayed around the display lamps 38a, 38b, and 38c in order to clearly inform the player.

[Variable winning device management processing]
Next, the details of the variable winning device management process will be described. FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing a configuration example of variable winning device management processing. The variable winning device management process includes a game process selection process (step S5100), a large winning opening pattern setting process (step S5200), a large winning opening opening/closing operation process (step S5300), a large winning opening closing process (step S5400), and finished. This configuration includes a group of subroutines for processing (step S5500).

Step S5100: In the game process selection process, the main control CPU72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (one of steps S5200 to S5500). That is, the main control CPU 72 selects the program address of the process to be executed next from the jump table as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the variable winning device management process to the stack pointer as the return destination address. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the operation (opening/closing operation) of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 has not yet started, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the large winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S5200). On the other hand, if the large winning opening opening pattern setting process has already been completed, the main control CPU 72 selects the large winning opening opening/closing operation process (step S5300) as the next jump destination, and completes up to the large winning opening opening/closing operation process. If so, the big winning opening closing process (step S5400) is selected as the next jump destination. In addition, when the large winning opening opening/closing operation process and the large winning opening closing process are repeatedly executed over the set number of consecutive operations (the number of rounds), the main control CPU 72 selects the end process (step S5500) as the next jump destination. . Each process will be described in more detail below.

[Large winning opening pattern setting process]
FIG. 33 is a flow chart showing a procedure example of the big winning opening opening pattern setting process. This processing is for setting the conditions such as the number of opening and closing operations of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 at the time of the big win or the small win, and the time for each opening. Each procedure will be described below.

Step S5202: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the jackpot flag value (01H) is set. As a result of this confirmation, if the jackpot flag value (01H) is set (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5203. On the other hand, if the big hit flag value (01H) is not set (No), that is, if the small hit flag value (01H) is set, the main control CPU72 then executes step S5204.

Step S5203: The main control CPU 72 executes a big winning opening pattern setting process at the time of a big hit. In this process, the opening pattern of the big winning opening corresponding to the winning symbol at the time of the big win is set based on the symbol-specific opening pattern setting table at the time of the big win. The specific contents of the processing will be further described later with reference to another flowchart. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5205.

Step S5204: The main control CPU 72 executes a big winning opening opening pattern setting process at the time of a small hit. In this process, the opening pattern of the big winning opening is set based on the small winning symbol opening pattern setting table. The specific contents of the processing will be further described later with reference to another flowchart. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5205.

Step S5205: After completing the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big winning opening opening/closing operation process, and returns to the variable winning device management process.

[Big winning opening pattern setting process at the time of big hit]
FIG. 34 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the big winning opening opening pattern setting process at the time of big winning. The contents will be described below according to the procedure example.

Step S5210: The main control CPU 72 operates the condition device and the accessory continuous operation device. Here, the "condition device" is a device whose operation is a necessary condition for the operation of the role product continuous operation device, and the "role product continuous operation device" refers to the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable prize winning device 30. It is a device that can operate the variable winning device 31 continuously. In addition, the "condition device" and the "accessory continuous operation device" can also be used as flags for control. Therefore, as long as this condition device is not operating, it means that the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 do not operate in the jackpot game. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5212.

Step S5212: The main control CPU 72 sets "big win start (during jackpot game)" as an internal state flag for control. In addition, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the continuous operation count status according to the type of the jackpot symbol. For example, when the winning symbol is the first winning symbol or the second winning symbol, a value representing "3 rounds" is set in the continuous operation count status. Also, the main control CPU 72 generates a status command indicating that the jackpot is in progress. A state command indicating that the jackpot is in progress is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the above effect control output process. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5214.

Step S5214: The main control CPU 72 executes the opening pattern selection process for each symbol at the time of the big hit. In this process, the main control CPU 72 refers to the jackpot symbol-by-symbol opening pattern setting table, and selects an opening pattern corresponding to the winning symbol type related to the special symbol. Here, the opening pattern represents the setting for operating the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31, for example, the number of execution rounds, opening time, interval time, and the like. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5216.

[Opening pattern setting table for each pattern at the time of jackpot]
FIG. 35 is a diagram showing an example of an opening pattern setting table classified by symbol at the time of a big hit. The opening pattern setting table for each symbol at the time of a big hit defines the opening and closing operation pattern of the variable winning device (first variable winning device 30 or second variable winning device 31) to be operated for each round for each different winning symbol related to the special symbol. is. Specifically, the opening patterns of the following big winning openings are determined for each winning symbol.

[1st winning design]
The variable winning device to be activated is the first variable winning device 30 when it corresponds to the first winning symbol. Also, the number of rounds to be executed is 3 rounds, 3 of which are rounds with balls. The opening time for opening the first big winning hole 30b is 29.0 seconds per round in the round with balls. Also, the interval time provided between each round is 1.0 second.

In this way, when the winning symbol related to the special symbol is the first winning symbol, when the jackpot game is started, the first variable winning device 30 is activated for 29.0 seconds during each round from the first round to the third round. It operates to open the first big winning hole 30b (however, it is closed when the upper limit number of balls is confirmed. The same applies hereinafter). Therefore, when the first winning symbol is obtained, it is possible to substantially obtain three rounds worth of balls.

[Second winning pattern]
The variable winning device to be activated is the first variable winning device 30 when it corresponds to the second winning symbol. Also, the number of rounds to be executed is 3 rounds, 3 of which are rounds with balls. The opening time for opening the first big winning hole 30b is 29.0 seconds per round in the round with balls. Also, the interval time provided between each round is 1.0 second.

In this way, when the winning symbol related to the special symbol is the second winning symbol, when the jackpot game is started, the first variable winning device 30 is operated for 29.0 seconds during each round from the first round to the third round. It operates to open the first big prize winning opening 30b. Therefore, when the second winning symbol is obtained, it is possible to obtain balls for three rounds.

[3rd winning design]
The variable winning device to be activated is the first variable winning device 30 when it corresponds to the third winning symbol. Also, the number of rounds to be executed is two rounds, two of which are rounds with balls. The opening time for opening the first big winning hole 30b is 29.0 seconds per round in the round with balls. Also, the interval time provided between each round is 1.0 second.

In this way, when the winning symbol related to the special symbol is the third winning symbol, when the jackpot game is started, the first variable winning device 30 is operated for 29.0 seconds from the first round to the second round during each round. It operates to open the first big prize winning opening 30b. Therefore, when the third winning symbol is obtained, it is possible to substantially obtain balls for two rounds.

As described above, the main control CPU 72 sets the opening pattern of the big winning opening corresponding to the type of winning symbol by referring to the symbol-by-symbol opening pattern setting table at the time of the big win.

[See FIG. 34: Big Winning Opening Pattern Setting Process for Big Win]
Step S<b>5216 : The main control CPU 72 sets the operation of the first variable winning device 30 . Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the type of the variable winning device to be operated in each round (first round to final round) during the jackpot game to the first variable winning device 30 based on the opening pattern corresponding to the winning symbol. do. In the present embodiment, the opening patterns corresponding to the winning symbols (first winning symbols to third winning symbols) at the time of all the big hits are the first round to the final round, so that the first big winning opening 30b is opened. The operation of the first variable winning device 30 is set. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5218.

Step S5218: The main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of rounds to be executed during the big hit game based on the release pattern corresponding to the winning symbol. For example, 3 rounds are set as the number of execution rounds of the release pattern corresponding to the 3-land jackpot (first winning symbol and second winning symbol). The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5220.

Step S5220: The main control CPU 72 sets a jackpot time open timer. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the opening time (opening timer) per time when opening the big winning opening for each round at the time of the big hit. In this embodiment, it is set for each round based on the release time of the release pattern corresponding to the winning symbols (first to third winning symbols) at the time of the big win. For example, in the case of the first winning symbol, the opening time for opening the first big winning opening 30b is set to 29.0 seconds for rounds with balls. Therefore, if the value of the open timer is set to about 29.0 seconds, the open time is a sufficient time (for example, launch 10 or more game balls are shot by the control board set 174, preferably 6 seconds or more). If the value of the opening timer is set to about 0.5 seconds, the opening time is the time during which it is difficult for the ball to enter the first big winning hole 30b during one opening. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5222.

Step S5222: The main control CPU 72 sets an interval timer at the time of the big hit. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the waiting time (interval timer) between rounds at the time of the big hit. In the present embodiment, 1.0 second is set as the interval timer for the release patterns corresponding to all winning symbols (first to third winning symbols) at the time of the big win. For example, an interval timer of about 1.0 second is set after the opening of the first big prize opening 30b between the first round and the second round is completed and the opening is temporarily closed. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5224.

Step S5224: The main control CPU 72 generates a continuous operation count command. The continuous operation count command can be generated based on the number of execution rounds set in the previous process (step S5218). For example, when the winning symbol is the first winning symbol or the second winning symbol, the number of execution rounds is "3 rounds", so the continuous operation count command is generated as a command including a value representing "3 rounds". The generated continuous actuation number command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the above effect control output process.

After completing the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 returns to the big winning opening opening pattern setting process (FIG. 33).

[Processing for setting the pattern of opening the big winning opening at the time of the small hit]
FIG. 36 is a flow chart showing an example of a procedure for setting a pattern for opening a large winning opening at the time of a small hit. An example procedure will be described below.

Step S5252: The main control CPU 72 sets "small hit start (during small hit game)" as an internal state flag for control. Also, the main control CPU 72 generates a state command indicating that a small hit game is in progress. The state command indicating that the small winning game is in progress is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the above effect control output process. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5254.

Step S5254: The main control CPU 72 executes a small hit opening pattern selection process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 refers to the small hit opening pattern setting table and selects an opening pattern. Here, the opening pattern represents the setting for operating the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31, for example, the number of times of opening, the opening time, the interval time, the opening time of the specific area 31x, etc. ing. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5256.

[Small hit opening pattern setting table]
FIG. 37 is a diagram showing an example of a small hit opening pattern setting table. This small hit opening pattern setting table defines the opening and closing operation pattern of the variable winning device (second variable winning device 31). In this embodiment, one opening pattern is set at the time of a small hit, but a plurality of opening patterns may be set for each winning symbol.

The second variable winning device 31 is the variable winning device to be activated when a small hit is achieved. Also, the number of times the second variable winning device 31 is opened is two times, and the opening time for one time is 0.9 seconds. Note that the interval time is set to, for example, about 1.0 second.

The opening start time of the specific area 31x (the timing of turning ON the specific area solenoid 99 and operating the specific area slide member 31c) is 0.2 seconds after the opening of the second variable winning device 31 is started.
In addition, the opening end time of the specific area 31x (timing to turn off the specific area solenoid 99 and deactivate the specific area slide member 31c) is 1.8 seconds after the opening of the second variable winning device 31 is started. .

[See FIG. 36: Big Winning Opening Pattern Setting Process for Small Hits]
Step S 5256 : The main control CPU 72 sets the operation of the second variable winning device 31 . Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the type of the variable winning device to be operated during the small winning game to the second variable winning device 31 based on the opening pattern corresponding to the small winning. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5258.

Step S5258: The main control CPU 72 sets the number of times of opening. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of opening times to be executed during the small hit game based on the opening pattern corresponding to the small hit. In addition, in this embodiment, two times is set as the number of times of opening the opening pattern corresponding to the small hit. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5260.

Step S5260: The main control CPU 72 sets a small hit opening timer. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the opening time (opening timer) per time when opening the big winning opening based on the opening pattern corresponding to the small hit. In this embodiment, 0.9 second is set based on the opening time of the opening pattern corresponding to the small hit. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5262.

Step S5262: The main control CPU 72 sets a small hit interval timer. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the waiting time (interval timer) between the opening of the big winning opening based on the opening pattern corresponding to the small hit. Note that in this embodiment, the interval timer is set to a predetermined time (for example, 1.0 seconds). The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5264.

Step S5264: The main control CPU 72 sets an opening timer for the specific area 31x (specific area slide member 31c). Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the opening time (opening timer) of the specific area 31x during the small winning game based on the opening pattern corresponding to the small winning. In this embodiment, the specific area 31x is opened 0.2 seconds after the opening of the second variable winning device 31 is started, and the specific area 31x is closed 1.8 seconds after the opening of the second variable winning device 31 is started. be done.

After completing the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 returns to the big winning opening opening pattern setting process (FIG. 33).

[Grand prize opening opening/closing operation processing]
FIG. 38 is a flow chart showing a procedure example of the big winning opening opening/closing operation process. This processing is mainly for controlling the opening and closing operations of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31. FIG. The procedure will be described below.

Step S5302: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current internal state is "in duty". Specifically, the main control CPU 72 accesses the flag buffer of the RAM 76, and determines whether the current internal state is " Check whether or not the status is “In a big role”. It should be noted that the "during a big win (during a jackpot game)" flag is set by the main control CPU 72 during the previous process (during the process of setting the big winning opening pattern at the time of the big win: step S5212) or during the process when passing through a specific area to be described later. . As a result of this confirmation, if the current internal state is "during heavy duty" (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5306. On the other hand, if the current internal state is not "during heavy duty" (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5304.

Step S5304: The main control CPU 72 executes the second big winning opening opening/closing operation process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 operates the second variable winning device 31 to open and close the second large winning opening 31b based on the set opening pattern (apply to the second large winning opening solenoid 97 output a drive signal). The specific contents of the processing will be further described later with reference to another flowchart.

Step S5306: The main control CPU 72 executes the first big winning opening opening/closing operation process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 operates the first variable winning device 30 to open and close the first big winning hole 30b based on the set opening pattern (applies power to the first big winning hole solenoid 90). output a drive signal). The specific contents of the processing will be further described later with reference to another flowchart.

After completing the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process (FIG. 32).

[Second Grand Prize Opening Opening/Closing Operation Processing]
FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing a procedure example of the second big winning opening opening/closing operation process. The contents will be described below according to the procedure example.

Step S5310: The main control CPU72 opens the second big winning hole 31b. Specifically, it outputs a drive signal to be applied to the second big winning opening solenoid 97 . As a result, the second variable prize winning device 31 operates and shifts from the closed state to the open state. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5312.

Step S5312: The main control CPU 72 executes open timer countdown processing. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 counts down the opening timer set in the previous process (steps S5260 and S5264 of the small winning big winning opening pattern setting process (in FIG. 36)). In this process, in addition to the opening timer for opening the second big winning hole 31b, the opening timer (opening start time, opening end time) for opening the specific area 31x is counted down. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5314.

Step S5314: The main control CPU 72 executes specific area opening/closing operation processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 operates the specific area slide member 31c to open and close the specific area 31x based on the set opening pattern (outputs a drive signal to be applied to the specific area solenoid 99). process. The specific contents of the processing will be further described later with reference to another flowchart. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5316.

Step S5316: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the opening time of the second big winning opening 31b has ended. Specifically, it is checked whether the value of the open timer for the second big winning opening 31b during the countdown process is 0 or less. As a result of this confirmation, if the opening time of the second big winning hole 31b has ended (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5322. On the other hand, if the opening time of the second big winning hole 31b has not ended (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5318.

Step S5318: The main control CPU 72 executes winning ball count processing. In this process, the number of game balls that have won the second variable winning device 31 (opened large winning opening) within the opening time is counted. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 increments the value of the count based on the winning detection signal input from the second count switch 85 within the open time. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5320.

Step S5320: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current count number is less than a predetermined number (10). This predetermined number defines the upper limit of the number of prize-winning balls (upper limit of the number of prize-winning balls) permissible per opening at the time of a small hit, as described above. If the count number has not yet reached the predetermined number (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process. Then, when the variable winning device management process is executed next, the jump destination is set to the big winning opening opening/closing operation process at this stage, so the main control CPU 72 repeats the above steps S5310 to S5320.

If it is determined that the opening time has ended in step S5316 (Yes), or if it is confirmed that the count number has reached a predetermined number in step S5320 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5322. In addition, since the value of the open timer is set to a short time (for example, 1.8 seconds) for opening at the time of the small hit, the main control CPU 72 normally detects that the count number has reached a predetermined number in step S5310. In most cases, it is determined in step S5316 that the open time has expired before confirmation.

Step S5322: The main control CPU 72 closes the second big winning opening 31b. Specifically, the output of the driving signal applied to the second big winning opening solenoid 97 is stopped. As a result, the second variable winning device 31 returns from the open state to the closed state. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5324.

Step S5324: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the specific area passage flag is ON. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 accesses the flag buffer area of the RAM 76 and confirms whether or not the specific area passage flag is ON based on whether the value of the specific area passage flag is 01H. As a result of this confirmation, when the specific area passage flag is ON (Yes), that is, when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x while the second big winning opening 31b during the small hit game is open, the main Control CPU 72 then executes step S5326. On the other hand, if the specific area passing flag is not ON (No), that is, if the game ball does not pass through the specific area 31x while the second big winning opening 31b during the small hit game is open, the main control The CPU 72 then executes step S5327a. It should be noted that there is a possibility that the specific area passing flag will be set to ON during the previous specific area opening/closing operation process (step S5314).

Step S5326: The main control CPU 72 executes specific area passage processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 activates the condition device and the accessory continuous operating device based on the game ball passing through the specific area 31x while the second big winning hole 31b is open during the small winning game. , the process of continuously operating the first variable winning device 30, that is, the process of starting the jackpot game is executed (special game executing means via special game, special game executing means). The specific contents of the processing will be further described later with reference to another flowchart. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5328.

Step S5327a: The main control CPU 72 executes interval standby processing. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 executes the countdown of the interval timer set in the previous process (step S5265 of the small winning big winning opening pattern setting process (in FIG. 36)). When the interval timer value becomes 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S5327b. Although not particularly shown here, until the interval time elapses (until the interval timer value becomes 0), the main control CPU 72 manages the variable winning device that is the calling source from step S5327a for each interrupt. Return to the end address of the process (FIG. 32). Then, when the big winning opening opening/closing operation process is executed in the next call, step S5327a is executed directly instead of from the top step S5310.

Step S5327b: The main control CPU72 increments the value of the counter for the number of openings of the second big winning opening. The value of the counter for the number of openings of the second big winning opening is stored in the count area of the RAM 76 with an initial value of 0, for example.

Step S5327c: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the incremented second big winning opening open number counter has reached the number set in the current round. Here, the reason why ``the number of times set in the current round'' is determined is to correspond to the opening pattern of ``opening the second variable winning device 31 a plurality of times during one small winning'', for example. is. In addition, especially when such an opening pattern is not adopted, the "number of times set in the current round" is set to once in each round, so the counter value will increase with one opening and closing operation. Since the set number of times is reached (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S5328.

On the other hand, in the case of adopting the release pattern of ``opening the second variable winning device 31 multiple times during one small win'', the counter value still reaches the set number of times when one opening is completed. (No). In this case, when the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process, the jump destination is set to the big winning opening opening/closing operation process at this stage, so the above steps S5310 to S5327b are repeatedly executed. As a result, the increment of the open number counter progresses in step S5327b, and when the counter value reaches the set number of times (step S5327c; Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5328.

Step S5328: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big winning opening closing process, and returns to the big winning opening opening/closing operation process (FIG. 38). Then, when the variable winning device management process is executed next, the main control CPU 72 next executes the big winning opening closing process.

[Specific Area Opening/Closing Operation Processing]
FIG. 40 is a flow chart showing an example of the specific area opening/closing operation process. The contents will be described below according to the procedure example.

Step S5330: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the opening time of the specific area 31x has started. Specifically, the main control CPU72 counts down in the countdown process (step S5312) By confirming whether the value of the open timer for the opening start time related to opening the specific area 31x is 0, the specific area Check if the 31x open time has started. As a result of this confirmation, if the opening time of the specific area 31x has started (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5332. On the other hand, if the opening time of the specific area 31x has not started (No), or if it has already been opened, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5334.

Step S5332: The main control CPU72 releases the specific area 31x. Specifically, it outputs a drive signal to be applied to the specific area solenoid 99 . As a result, the specific area slide member 31c is actuated to shift the specific area 31x from the closed state to the open state. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5334.

Step S5334: The main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the game ball has passed through the specific area 31x. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 accesses the storage area of the RAM 76 and checks whether or not the specific area reserve flag is ON. As a result of this confirmation, when it is confirmed that the specific area reserve flag is ON and the game ball has passed through the specific area 31x (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5336. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the specific area preliminary flag is OFF and the game ball has not passed through the specific area 31x (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5338.

Step S5336: The main control CPU72 sets the specific area passage flag to ON. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 accesses the flag buffer area of the RAM 76 and sets the value of the specific area passage flag to 01H. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5338. It should be noted that the specific area passing flag and the specific area spare flag are reset at the end of the big hit game.

Step S5338: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the opening time of the specific area 31x has ended. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 checks whether the value of the open timer related to the opening of the specific area 31x counted down in the countdown process (step S5312) is 0, so that the opening time of the specific area 31x is Check if it is finished. As a result of this confirmation, if the opening time of the specific area 31x has ended (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5340. On the other hand, if the opening time of the specific area 31x has not ended (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the second big winning opening opening/closing operation process (FIG. 39).

Step S5340: The main control CPU72 closes the specific area 31x. Specifically, the output of the drive signal applied to the specific area solenoid 99 is stopped. As a result, the specific-region slide member 31c returns from the open state (operating state) to the closed state (non-operating state).

After completing the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 returns to the second big winning opening opening/closing operation process (FIG. 39).

[Processing when passing through a specific area]
FIG. 41 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure for processing when passing through a specific area. The contents will be described below according to the procedure example.

Step S5350: The main control CPU72 resets the small hit flag. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 accesses the flag buffer area of the RAM 76 and resets the value of the small hit flag to 00H. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5352.

Step S5352: The main control CPU72 terminates the small hit game. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 erases "during small winning game" from the internal state flag, and ends the small winning game on the control process (end of small winning). The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5354.

Step S5354: The main control CPU 72 operates the condition device and the accessory continuous operation device. As a result, the first variable winning device 30 can be operated continuously, and a big win game can be started. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5356.

Step S5356: The main control CPU 72 sets "big win start (during jackpot game)" as an internal state flag for control. In addition, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the continuous operation count status according to the type of winning symbol. For example, when the winning symbol is the first winning symbol or the second winning symbol, a value representing "3 rounds" is set in the continuous operation count status. Also, the main control CPU 72 generates a status command indicating that the jackpot is in progress. A state command indicating that the jackpot is in progress is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the above effect control output process. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5358.

Step S5358: The main control CPU 72 executes the pattern-specific release pattern selection process when passing through a specific area. In this process, the main control CPU 72 refers to the pattern-specific opening pattern setting table when passing through a specific area, and selects an opening pattern corresponding to the type of winning symbol when a small hit is achieved. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5360.

Step S5360: The main control CPU 72 sets the operation of the first variable winning device 30. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 operates a variable prize winning device for each round (second round to final round) during the big win game based on the release pattern corresponding to the special symbol when the small win is won. The type is set to the first variable winning device 30 . The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5362.

Step S5362: The main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of rounds to be executed during the big hit game, based on the release pattern corresponding to the winning symbol related to the special symbol when the small hit is achieved. For example, "10 rounds" is set as the number of execution rounds of the release pattern corresponding to the fourth winning symbol. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5364.

Step S5364: The main control CPU 72 sets an opening timer for the big hit. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the opening time (opening timer) per time when opening the big winning opening for each round at the time of the big hit. In the present embodiment, it is set for each round based on the opening time of the opening pattern corresponding to the winning symbols (fourth winning symbol to sixth winning symbol) related to the special symbols when a small hit is made. For example, in the case of the fourth winning symbol, the opening time for opening the first big winning opening 30b is set to 29.0 seconds for rounds with balls. Therefore, if the value of the open timer is set to about 29.0 seconds, the open time is a sufficient time (for example, launch 10 or more game balls are shot by the control board set 174, preferably 6 seconds or more). If the value of the opening timer is set to about 0.5 seconds, the opening time is the time during which it is difficult for the ball to enter the first big winning hole 30b during one opening. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5366.

Step S5366: The main control CPU 72 sets a jackpot time interval timer. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the waiting time (interval timer) between rounds at the time of the big hit. In the present embodiment, 1.0 second is set as the interval timer for the opening patterns corresponding to the winning symbols (fourth winning symbol to sixth winning symbol) relating to special symbols when a small hit is achieved. For example, an interval timer of about 1.0 seconds is set after the opening of the first big prize opening 30b between the second round and the third round is completed and the opening is temporarily closed. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5368.

Step S5368: The main control CPU 72 generates a continuous operation count command. The continuous operation count command can be generated based on the number of execution rounds set in the previous process (step S5362). For example, in the case of the fourth winning symbol, the number of execution rounds is "10 rounds", so the continuous operation count command is generated as a command including a value representing "10 rounds". The generated continuous actuation number command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the above effect control output process. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5370.

Step S5370: The main control CPU 72 executes the pattern-specific time reduction function setting process when passing through the specific area. In this process, if the winning symbols related to the special symbols are the "fourth winning symbol" to "sixth winning symbol" at the time of the small hit, the main control CPU 72 sets the time reduction function operation flag to ON (time shortening state transition means, time shortening function operating means). In addition, in this embodiment, when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x corresponding to the "fourth winning pattern" to "sixth winning pattern", it is always shifted to the time shortening state. Only winning symbols may be shifted to the time shortening state.

Step S5372: The main control CPU 72 executes special fluctuation number setting processing. In this process, the main control CPU72 sets the number of special fluctuations to "10" when setting "6" as the number of times of time saving, and sets "104" when setting "100" as the number of times of time saving. Execute the process. The reason why the value obtained by adding "4" to the number of times of time reduction is to make the fluctuation of the second special symbol after the time reduction state is completed (fluctuation of remaining hold) special fluctuation.

Then, the number of special fluctuations is decremented (-1) when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed. When the number of times of special variation takes a value of "104 to 5", the special variation pattern for the time shortening state of the second special symbol is selected. Also, when the number of special variations takes a value of "4 to 1", a special variation pattern for the non-time reduction state of the second special symbol is selected. Furthermore, when the number of times of special variation takes a value of "0", the normal variation pattern for the non-time reduction state of the second special symbol is selected.

After completing the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 returns to the second big winning opening opening/closing operation process (FIG. 39).

[Open pattern setting table for each pattern when passing through a specific area]
FIG. 42 is a diagram showing an example of an opening pattern setting table for each symbol when passing through a specific area. The pattern-specific opening pattern setting table at the time of passing through the specific area defines the opening/closing operation pattern of the first variable prize winning device 30 for each round for each different winning pattern related to the special pattern when a small win is achieved. Specifically, the opening patterns of the following big winning openings are determined for each winning symbol.

[4th winning design]
When the game ball passes through the specific area 31x corresponding to the fourth winning symbol, the variable winning device to be activated is the first variable winning device 30. FIG. Also, the number of execution rounds is 10 rounds. Since the number of executed rounds includes the operation of the second variable prize winning device 31 which is opened by the small win, the jackpot game to be started from now on will have 9 rounds, which is 10 rounds minus 1 round. It becomes the substantial number of rounds in the jackpot game (hereinafter, the same applies to the fifth winning symbol and the sixth winning symbol). Also, 9 rounds out of the 9 rounds are rounds with balls. The opening time for opening the first big winning hole 30b is 29.0 seconds per round in the round with balls. Also, the interval time provided between each round is 1.0 second.

In this way, when the winning symbol related to the special symbol at the time of the small winning is the fourth winning symbol, when the big winning game is started, the opening of the second variable winning device 31 at the small winning is regarded as the first round. Therefore, from the second round to the tenth round, the first variable prize winning device 30 operates for 29.0 seconds during each round to open the first big prize winning opening 30b. Therefore, when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x corresponding to the fourth winning symbol, it is possible to obtain substantially 9 rounds worth of balls.

[5th winning design]
When the game ball passes through the specific area 31x corresponding to the fifth winning symbol, the variable winning device to be activated is the first variable winning device 30. FIG. Also, the number of rounds to be executed is 7 rounds (the number of rounds in the substantial jackpot game is 6 rounds), 6 rounds of which are rounds with balls. The opening time for opening the first big winning hole 30b is 29.0 seconds per round in the round with balls. Also, the interval time provided between each round is 1.0 second.

In this way, when the winning pattern related to the special symbol at the time of the small win is the fifth winning pattern, when the big win game is started, the opening of the second variable winning device 31 in the small win is regarded as the first round. Therefore, from the second round to the seventh round, the first variable prize winning device 30 operates for 29.0 seconds during each round to open the first big prize winning opening 30b. Therefore, when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x corresponding to the fifth winning symbol, it is possible to obtain substantially six rounds worth of balls.

[6th winning design]
When the game ball passes through the specific area 31x corresponding to the sixth winning symbol, the variable winning device to be activated is the first variable winning device 30.例文帳に追加Also, the number of rounds to be executed is 4 rounds (the number of rounds in the substantial jackpot game is 3 rounds), 3 rounds of which are rounds with balls. The opening time for opening the first big winning hole 30b per round in the round with balls is 29.0 seconds, and the interval time provided between each round is 1.0 second.

In this way, when the winning symbol related to the special symbol at the time of the small winning is the sixth winning symbol, when the big winning game is started, the first variable prize winning device 30 is 29. from the second round to the fourth round. It operates during each round for 0 seconds to open the first big winning hole 30b. Therefore, when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x corresponding to the sixth winning symbol, it is possible to substantially obtain three rounds worth of balls.

As described above, the main control CPU 72 refers to the pattern-specific opening pattern setting table when passing through the specific area, and sets the opening pattern of the big winning opening corresponding to the type of the winning symbol related to the special symbol when the small hit occurs. It will be done.

[1st Grand Prize Opening Opening/Closing Operation Processing]
FIG. 43 is a flow chart showing a procedure example of the first big winning opening opening/closing operation process. An example procedure will be described below.

Step S5380: The main control CPU72 opens the first big winning hole 30b. Specifically, it outputs a driving signal to be applied to the first big winning opening solenoid 90 . As a result, the first variable prize winning device 30 operates and shifts from the closed state to the open state. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5382.

Step S5382: The main control CPU 72 executes open timer countdown processing. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 set in the previous process (step S5220 of the big winning opening pattern setting process (in FIG. 34) at the time of the big hit, or step S5364 in the specific area passing process (in FIG. 41)) Run the open timer countdown. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5386.

Step S5386: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the opening time of the first big winning opening 30b has ended. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the open timer for the first big winning hole 30b after the countdown process is 0 or less. As a result of this confirmation, if the opening time of the first big winning hole 30b has ended (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5392. On the other hand, if the opening time of the first big winning hole 30b has not ended (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5388.

Step S5388: The main control CPU 72 executes winning ball count processing. In this process, the number of game balls that have won the first variable prize winning device 30 (the large prize winning opening that is open) within the opening time is counted. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 increments the value of the count based on the winning detection signal input from the first count switch 84 within the open time. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5390.

Step S5390: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current count number is less than a predetermined number (10). This predetermined number defines the upper limit of the number of winning balls (upper limit of the number of prize balls) allowed per opening (one round during a big win) as described above. If the count number has not yet reached the predetermined number (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process. Then, when the variable winning device management process is executed next, the main control CPU 72 repeats the above steps S5380 to S5390 because the jump destination is set to the big winning opening opening/closing operation process at this stage.

If it is determined that the opening time has ended in step S5386 (Yes), or if it is confirmed that the count number has reached a predetermined number in step S5390 (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5392. If the value of the open timer is set to a short time (for example, 0.5 seconds), the main control CPU 72 normally performs step S5390 before confirming that the count number has reached a predetermined number. In most cases, it is determined in S5386 that the open time has ended.

Step S5392: The main control CPU 72 closes the first big winning opening 30b. Specifically, the output of the driving signal applied to the first big winning opening solenoid 90 is stopped. As a result, the first variable winning device 30 returns from the open state to the closed state. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5394.

Step S5394: The main control CPU 72 executes interval standby processing. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 set in the previous process (step S5222 of the big winning opening pattern setting process (in FIG. 34) at the time of the big hit, or step S5366 in the specific area passing process (in FIG. 41)) Execute the interval timer countdown. When the interval timer value becomes 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S5395. Although not particularly shown here, until the interval time elapses (until the interval timer value becomes 0), the main control CPU 72 manages the variable winning device that is the caller from step S5394 for each interrupt. Return to the end address of the process (FIG. 32). Then, when the big winning opening opening/closing operation process is executed in the next call, step S5394 is executed directly instead of from the top step S5380.

Step S5395: The main control CPU 72 increments the value of the opening number counter. The value of the open number counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 76 with an initial value of 0, for example.

Step S5396: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the open number counter after increment has reached the number set in the current round. Here, the reason why ``the number of times set in the current round'' is determined is to correspond to the opening pattern of, for example, ``opening the first variable winning device 30 multiple times in one round during the jackpot''. is. In this embodiment, since such an opening pattern is not particularly adopted, the "number of times set in the current round" is set to once in each round. Therefore, since the counter value usually reaches the set number of times in one opening/closing operation (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S5398 next.

If a pattern is adopted in which opening and closing operations are repeated a plurality of times within one round as described above, the counter value has not yet reached the set number of times at the end of one opening operation (No). In this case, when the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process, the jump destination is set to the big winning opening opening/closing operation process at this stage, so the above steps S5380 to S5390 are repeatedly executed. As a result, the opening counter is incremented in step S5395, and when the counter value reaches the set number (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S5398.

Step S5398: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big winning opening closing process, and returns to the big winning opening opening/closing operation process (FIG. 38). Then, when the variable winning device management process is executed next, the main control CPU 72 next executes the big winning opening closing process.

[Grand Prize Opening Closing Process]
FIG. 44 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the big winning opening closing process. This big winning opening closing process is for continuing the operation of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 or ending the operation. The procedure will be described below.

Step S5401: First, the main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the current game is in a big win (jackpot game), and if it is in a big win (Yes), the main control CPU72 next executes step S5402.

Step S5402: The main control CPU 72 increments the round number counter. As a result, for example, the first round is completed, and the value of the round number counter is "1" at the stage toward the second round. When the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small winning game and the big winning game is started after the small winning is finished, the opening of the second big winning opening 31b at the time of the small winning is treated as the first round, and the big winning is achieved. The first round in which play is started is treated as the second round.

Step S5404: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the incremented round number counter has reached the set execution round number. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 refers to the incremented round number counter value (1 to 15), and if the value is less than the set execution round number (14 or 15 after subtracting 1) ( No), then step S5405 is executed.

Step S5405: The main control CPU 72 generates a round number command from the current round number counter value. This command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process as described above. The effect control device 124 can confirm the current round number based on the received round number command.

Step S5406: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big winning opening opening/closing operation process.

Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the variable winning device management process.

When the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process, in the game process selection process (step S5100 in FIG. 32), the main control CPU 72 executes the big winning opening opening/closing operation process, which is the next jump destination. After executing the large winning opening opening/closing operation process, the main control CPU 72 executes the large winning opening closing process again after executing the large winning opening closing process, and repeats the above steps S5402 to S5408. As a result, the opening/closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 is continuously performed until the actual number of rounds reaches the set number of execution rounds.

When the actual number of rounds reaches the set number of execution rounds (step S5404: Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5410.

Steps S5410, S5412: In this case, when the main control CPU 72 resets (=0) the round number counter, the next jump destination is set to end processing.

Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the variable winning device management process. As a result, when the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process, the end process is selected this time.

[At the time of small hit]
On the other hand, in the case of a small hit, the procedure is as follows (special operation executing means).
Step S5411: When the main control CPU 72 confirms that the current game is not in a big role (step S5401: No), it increments the value of the opening number counter.

Step S5413: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the open number counter after incrementing has reached the set open number. The number of times of opening is set in the previous big winning opening opening pattern setting process at the time of small winning (step S5258 in FIG. 36). If the value of the opening number counter has not yet reached the set opening number (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5416.

Step S5416: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big winning opening opening/closing operation process.
Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the variable winning device management process.

When the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process, in the game process selection process (step S5100 in FIG. 32), the main control CPU 72 executes the big winning opening opening/closing operation process, which is the next jump destination. Then, after executing the big winning opening opening/closing operation process, the main control CPU 72 executes the big winning opening closing process again, and after the above steps S5401 to S5413 (No), step S5416. , step S5408 is repeatedly executed. As a result, the opening/closing operation of the second variable winning device 31 is repeatedly executed until the actual number of times of opening reaches the set number of times of opening.

When the actual number of times of opening at the time of the small hit reaches the set number of times of opening (step S5413: Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5414.

Steps S5414, S5412: In this case, when the main control CPU 72 resets the opening number counter (=0), the next jump destination is set to end processing.

Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the variable winning device management process. As a result, when the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process, the end process is selected this time.

〔End processing〕
FIG. 45 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of termination processing. This ending process is for preparing conditions for ending the operation of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 . An example procedure will be described below.

Step S5502: The main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot flag (01H) is set, and if the value of the jackpot flag is set (Yes), the main control CPU72 next executes step S5503. do.

Step S5503, step S5504: In this case, the main control CPU72 resets the big hit flag (00H). As a result, the big hit game state ends in the control processing of the main control CPU 72 . In addition, the main control CPU 72 erases "during a big hit" from the internal state flag here, and ends the big win game on the control process (end of the big win). The main control CPU 72 resets the value of the continuous operation count status.

Step S5510: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the time reduction function activation flag is 01H (set). This flag is set during the previous special symbol variation pre-processing (step S2414 in FIG. 24) during the big hit and other setting processing (step S2414 in FIG. 24), and during the previous specific area passing processing during the specific area passage time reduction function setting processing (Fig. This is set in step S5370 in 41).

Step S5512: Then, if the value of the time reduction function operation flag is 01H (step S5510: Yes), the main control CPU72 sets the number of times of time saving (for example, 6 times (or 10 times), 100 times (or 104 times)) do. The set value of the number of times of time saving is stored in the time saving count area of the RAM 76 as described above. The time saving frequency set here becomes the upper limit frequency for shortening the variation time of the special symbol in subsequent games. In the present embodiment, in order to manage the number of times of time saving, the number of times cutting counter values (first times cutting counter value, second times cutting counter value) related to two types of time saving states are prepared. Here, the first cut counter value is a variable that is decremented (subtracted by 1) each time the second special symbol fluctuates once, and is set to "6" or "100" as an initial value. Also, the second cut counter value is a variable that is decremented each time the first special symbol or the second special symbol fluctuates once, and is set to "10" or "104" as an initial value. If the value of the time reduction function activation flag is not 01H (step S5510: No), the main control CPU72 does not execute steps S5512 and S5513.

By executing such processing, the main control CPU72, when the conditions for shifting to the time reduction state are satisfied (when the predetermined transition conditions are satisfied, when winning with winning symbols to shift to the time reduction state ), after the end of the jackpot game, from the non-time-reduced state (predetermined game state), favorable conditions were applied compared to the non-time-reduced state (the fluctuation time of the normal symbol lottery was shortened, and the variable start winning device It is possible to shift to a time shortening state (advantageous game state) in which the open time is extended (advantageous game state transition means).

Step S5513: The main control CPU 72 executes special fluctuation number setting processing. This process is the same as the process of step S5372 in FIG.

The procedure up to this point is for the case of a big hit, but in the case of a small hit (step S5502: No), the following procedure is executed.

Step S5520, step S5522: In the case of a small hit, the main control CPU72 resets the value of the small hit flag (00H), and erases "in play" from the internal state flag. It should be noted that in the case of a small win, such a procedure is merely for the purpose of clearing the flag, especially since the internal conditioning device is not activated.

Step S5514: Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a state designation command based on the flag. Specifically, in accordance with the reset of the jackpot flag or the end of the big win, a state designation command representing "normal" as the game state is generated. Also, if the time reduction function activation flag is set, it generates a state designation command indicating "time reduction" as the internal state. These state designation commands are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

Step S5516: After the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big winning opening opening pattern setting process.

Step S5518: Then, the main control CPU72 sets the jump destination in the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 23) in the special symbol game process to the special symbol variation pre-process. After completing the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process.

[Solenoid management processing]
FIG. 46 is a flow chart showing an example procedure of solenoid management processing. An example procedure will be described below.

Step S2800: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the power-on operation has been completed. Immediately after turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1, if the operation at the time of turning on the starting device right solenoid 481 and the starting device left solenoid 491 has not been completed (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S2810.

Step S2810: The main control CPU 72 executes power-on operation processing. In this process, the starting device right solenoid 481 and the starting device left solenoid 491 are operated in a predetermined movable pattern. As a result, the left wing member 442 and the right wing member 438 of the starting device 400 operate based on a fixed movement pattern from when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on to when the power is turned off. When the power-on operation is completed, it is determined that the operation is completed (Yes) in step S2800, so step S2810 is skipped thereafter.
After completing the above processing, the main control CPU 72 returns to the interrupt management processing (FIG. 18).

47 is a timing chart showing movement patterns of the starting device right solenoid 481 and the starting device left solenoid 491. FIG.

[Time t0]
Starter right solenoid 481 is inactive.
Starter left solenoid 491 is inactive.

[Time t1]
Starter right solenoid 481 is activated.
Starter left solenoid 491 is inactive.

[Time t2]
The starting device right solenoid 481 stops operating and becomes non-operating.
Starter left solenoid 491 is inactive.

[Time t3]
Starter right solenoid 481 is inactive.
Starter left solenoid 491 is activated.

[Time t4]
Starter right solenoid 481 is inactive.
The starting device left solenoid 491 stops operating and becomes non-operating.

[Time t5]
Starter right solenoid 481 is inactive.
Starter left solenoid 491 is inactive.

A time T1 from time t0 to time t1 is, for example, 50 ms.
A time T2 from time t1 to time t2 is, for example, 100 ms.
A time T3 from time t2 to time t3 is, for example, 50 ms.
A time T4 from time t3 to time t4 is, for example, 100 ms.
A time T5 from time t4 to time t5 is, for example, 500 ms.

A time TA from time t0 to time t5 is one cycle (for example, 800 ms), and this one-cycle movable pattern is repeatedly executed from when the power is turned on until when the power is turned off. A plurality of types of movable patterns for one cycle may be prepared, and the plurality of types of movable patterns may be repeatedly executed.

By applying such a movable pattern, the game ball entering the starting device 400 is made to enter the starting winning port of the first special symbol (starting device middle starting winning port 452 or starting device right starting winning port 450). At the same time, more game balls than that can be made to enter the normal symbol starting winning opening (starting device left starting winning opening 454).

Specifically, assuming that 12 game balls enter the ball entrance 430 of the starting device 400 in one minute, on average, two of them enter the starting device right starting winning hole 450. After entering, two game balls enter the starting device inside start winning port 452, and the remaining eight game balls enter the starting device left starting winning port 454. - 特許庁

Further, by executing such processing, the main control CPU 72 can move the left wing member 442 (movable body) and the right wing member 438 (movable body) in a predetermined movement pattern in the normal game state (first state). The left blade member 442 and the right blade member 438 can be continuously movable in a predetermined movable pattern even in the jackpot game state (second state) (control means).

[Game Flow (Part 1)]
FIG. 48 is a diagram explaining the game flow developed when the first special symbol changes in the normal mode.
When a game is started with the pachinko machine 1, the game is started from [F1] normal mode (park mode). "Normal mode" is a "non-reduced time state".

[F1] During a game in the normal mode, when a game ball enters the starting device middle starting winning port 452 or the starting device right starting winning port 450 (in a state where the memory of the second special symbol does not exist, the first If the memory of the special symbol exists), [F2] the first special symbol changes.

[F3] If the first special symbol lottery results in a "loss", the state of [F1] normal mode is restarted.

[F4] When the first special symbol lottery results in a "big hit (winning probability 1/319)" and [F5] the first winning symbol is obtained, [F6] a big winning game is executed, and [F8] shifts to the drive mode. [F8] The drive mode is a "time reduction state".

[F4] If the first special symbol lottery results in a "big win (winning probability 1/319)" and [F7] the second winning symbol is obtained, [F6] a big win game is executed, and [F8] shifts to the drive mode.

Thus, in the state of staying in the normal mode (non-reduced time state), if a big hit is made in the first special symbol lottery, regardless of what kind of winning symbol it corresponds to, after the big win game is over, drive mode.

[Game Flow (Part 2)]
FIG. 49 is a diagram explaining the game flow developed when the second special symbol changes in the normal mode.
[F1] When the game ball enters the right start winning hole 28b during the game in the normal mode (if the memory of the second special symbol exists), [F12] the second special symbol changes.

[F13] If the second special symbol lottery results in a "loss", the state of [F1] normal mode is restarted.

[F14] When the second special symbol lottery results in a "big hit (winning probability 1/319)" and [F15] the third winning symbol is obtained, [F6] a big winning game is executed, and [F8] shifts to the drive mode.

[F16] The second special symbol lottery results in a "small win (winning probability 1/6)", [F17] corresponds to the fourth winning symbol, and [F18] when the game ball passes through the specific area during the small winning game, [F6] A jackpot game is executed, and [F8] shifts to the drive mode.

[F16] The second special symbol lottery results in a "small win (winning probability 1/6)", [F19] corresponds to the fifth winning symbol, and [F18] when the game ball passes through the specific area during the small winning game, [F6] A jackpot game is executed, and [F8] shifts to the drive mode.

[F16] The second special symbol lottery results in a "minor win (winning probability 1/6)", [F20] corresponds to the sixth winning symbol, and [F18] when the game ball passes through the specific area during the minor win game, [F6] A jackpot game is executed, and [F8] shifts to the drive mode.

[Game Flow (Part 3)]
FIG. 50 is a diagram explaining the game flow developed when the first special symbol changes in the drive mode.
[F8] During a game in the drive mode, when a game ball enters the starting device left starting winning port 454 of the starting device 400 or the starting device middle starting winning port 452 of the starting device 400 (the memory of the second special symbol exists If the memory of the first special symbol exists in the state where it has not been done), [F2] the first special symbol fluctuates. Note that the drive mode may be in a non-time reduction state.

[F3] If "lost" in the first special symbol lottery, the state of [F8] drive mode is restarted. However, if it is the time saving final variation that ends the time shortening state, the normal mode is shifted to by the end of this deviation variation.

[F4] When the first special symbol lottery results in a "big hit (winning probability 1/319)" and [F5] the first winning symbol is obtained, [F6] a big winning game is executed, and [F8] shifts to the drive mode.

[F4] If the first special symbol lottery results in a "big win (winning probability 1/319)" and [F7] the second winning symbol is obtained, [F6] a big win game is executed, and [F8] shifts to the drive mode.

In this way, when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery while staying in the drive mode (time shortening state), the drive mode is activated after the jackpot game regardless of the winning symbol. transition to

[Game Flow (Part 4)]
FIG. 51 is a diagram explaining the game flow developed when the second special symbol changes in the drive mode.
[F8] When the game ball enters the right start winning hole 28b during the game in the drive mode (if the memory of the second special symbol exists), [F12] the second special symbol changes.

[F13] If the second special symbol lottery results in a "loss", the state of [F8] drive mode is restarted. However, if it is the time saving final variation that ends the time shortening state, the normal mode is shifted to by the end of this deviation variation.

[F14] When the second special symbol lottery results in a "big hit (winning probability 1/319)" and [F15] the third winning symbol is obtained, [F6] a big winning game is executed, and [F8] shifts to the drive mode.

[F16] The second special symbol lottery results in a "small win (winning probability 1/6)", [F17] corresponds to the fourth winning symbol, and [F18] when the game ball passes through the specific area during the small winning game, [F6] A jackpot game is executed, and [F8] shifts to the drive mode.

[F16] The second special symbol lottery results in a "small win (winning probability 1/6)", [F19] corresponds to the fifth winning symbol, and [F18] when the game ball passes through the specific area during the small winning game, [F6] A jackpot game is executed, and [F8] shifts to the drive mode.

[F16] The second special symbol lottery results in a "minor win (winning probability 1/6)", [F20] corresponds to the sixth winning symbol, and [F18] when the game ball passes through the specific area during the minor win game, [F6] A jackpot game is executed, and [F8] shifts to the drive mode.

In this way, if you win the second special symbol lottery, even if you stay in the normal mode (non-reduced time state) or stay in the drive mode (reduced time state), after the jackpot game ends , to switch to drive mode.

[Example of production image]
Next, several examples will be given to explain the effect image actually displayed on the liquid crystal display 42 in the pachinko machine 1 and the display mode of the 7-segment display device 200 . As described above, when the jackpot internal lottery is performed in the pachinko machine 1, the variation pattern (variation time) is determined under the control of the main control CPU 72, and the variation display by the first special symbol and the second special symbol is performed. (symbol display means). However, as described above, since the first special symbol and the second special symbol themselves are lighting/blinking display by the 7-segment LED, they lack visual appeal. Similarly, the mode of stop display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 is a symbolic design by a 7-segment LED or the like. It lacks the visual impact of ". Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, a variable display effect and a stop display effect using the liquid crystal display 42 and the 7-segment display device 200 are performed.

In this embodiment, the liquid crystal display device 42 displays the production pattern Hz (main pattern), the fourth patterns Z1 and Z2, the background image corresponding to the stay mode, the image related to the advance notice production, and the like. , the 7-segment production pattern is displayed.

The effect pattern Hz displayed on the liquid crystal display 42 includes, for example, three patterns of a left effect pattern, a middle effect pattern, and a right effect pattern. displayed side by side. Numbers "1" to "9" are displayed in each of the performance symbols. Here, the left effect pattern, the middle effect pattern, and the right effect pattern constitute a pattern sequence (effect pattern array) in which the numbers "9" to "1" are arranged in descending order. Such pattern rows are variably displayed so as to flow (scroll) in the vertical direction.

The 7-segment effect pattern displayed on the 7-segment display device 200 includes, for example, a left 7-segment effect pattern, a central 7-segment effect pattern, and a right 7-segment effect pattern, and these are 7-segment displays. They are displayed side by side on the left, middle, and right on the display area of the device 200 . Numbers "1" to "9" are displayed in each of the performance symbols. Here, each of the 7-segment production patterns constitutes a pattern row (production pattern arrangement) in which numbers "9" to "1" are arranged in descending order. Such pattern rows are variably displayed so as to flow (scroll) in the vertical direction.

52 and 53 are continuous diagrams showing examples of effect images corresponding to variable display and stop display of special symbols. It should be noted that here, regarding the variation of the special symbol at the time of non-winning (loss), an example of the variation display effect and the stop display effect performed using the liquid crystal display 42 and the 7-segment display device 200 is shown. This variable display effect corresponds to a series of effects performed between the start of the variable display of the special symbol (here, the first special symbol) and the stop display (including the fixed stop). Further, the stop display effect is a effect showing that the special symbol is stopped and displayed and the result of the internal lottery at that time is displayed. Here, before describing the specific contents of the control processing, the basic flow of the variable display effect and the stop display effect for each variation adopted in the present embodiment will be described first.

[Before change display]
(A) in FIG. 52: For example, in the state before the first special symbol starts to change (the state in which the demo effect is not in progress), three lines of the effect symbol Hz are displayed in the upper right area of the liquid crystal display 42. is displayed. At this time, according to the stop display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the effect symbol Hz is also stopped and displayed.

In addition, a fourth pattern (reference symbols Z1 and Z2 are attached in the figure) is displayed in the upper right area of the liquid crystal display 42 . The fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are "fourth effect symbols" following the left, middle and right effect symbols, and are variably displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the effect symbol Hz. The fourth patterns Z1 and Z2 are simply colored marks (for example, a figure of "□"), and by changing the display color, for example, a variable display can be expressed. The fourth design Z1 corresponds to the first special design, and the fourth design Z2 corresponds to the second special design.

Further, the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, white display color) corresponding to the loss. This is to objectively clarify that the pachinko machine 1 is operating normally, and that the stop display effect is correctly performed in response to the stop display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. It is. Therefore, if the result of the internal lottery is actually a "big win" or a "minor win" instead of "lose", the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are displayed in a manner corresponding to them (for example, blue display color, red display color, etc.). is stopped.

In the 7-segment display device 200, the 7-segment effect symbols are stopped and displayed in a displaced manner (“4”-“6”-“7”).

Further, in the memory display device 300, since all the four LEDs of the first special symbol memory display area M1 are lit, it indicates that the working memory number of the first special symbol is four, and the second special symbol memory. Since all the LEDs in the display area M2 are turned off, it means that the working memory number of the second special symbol is zero.

[Variation display effect start]
(B) in FIG. 52: For example, in synchronization with the start of variation of the first special symbol, variation of the 7-segment effect symbol of the 7-segment display device 200 is started, and the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 is scrolled. By doing so, the variable display effect is started. The variable display of the 7-segment effect pattern of the 7-segment display device 200 and the variable display of the effect pattern Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 are simply indicated by downward arrows.

A background image is displayed in the central area of the liquid crystal display 42, and this background image expresses the landscape of the park. Such a background image expresses that the stay mode in presentation is, for example, the "normal mode". "Normal mode" is a non-time reduction state. In addition to this, various modes are provided for production, and background images with different landscapes and scenes are prepared for each mode. These mode differences correspond to internal "time reduction states". Although not particularly shown here, after this, for example, an image of a character, an item, or the like may be displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42, so that an advance notice effect is performed.

In addition, during the variable display of the special symbols, the fourth pattern Z1 is variably displayed at the bottom of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and the fourth pattern Z1 expresses the variable display by changing its display color. .

[Example of production when the number of working memories is reduced]
Since the working memory number of the first special symbol is reduced by one with the start of the fluctuation, the number of lighting of the LEDs in the first special symbol storage and display area M1 is reduced from four to three. As a result, it is possible to teach the player that the memory of the first special symbol has been reduced to three, and the memory corresponding to any special symbol (in this case, the first special symbol) can be consumed. It can be taught in an easy-to-understand manner.

In addition, before the start of the variation, the LED of the memory display area X1 is not lit, but after the start of the variation, the LED of the memory display area X1 is lit, and the variation of the special symbol (performance symbol) is stopped and displayed. stays lit until

[Left production design stop]
(C) in FIG. 52: For example, after a certain amount of time (about half of the fluctuation time) has passed, the 7-segment effect pattern on the left side of the 7-segment display device 200 and the left side of the effect pattern Hz on the liquid crystal display 42 are displayed. The production pattern stops changing. In this example, the effect pattern representing the number "8" is stopped as the left 7-segment effect pattern of the 7-segment display device 200, and the number "8" is displayed as the left effect pattern of the effect pattern Hz of the liquid crystal display 42. The production pattern representing is stopped.

[Right production pattern stop]
(D) in FIG. 53: Next, as the 7-segment production pattern on the right side of the 7-segment display device 200, the production pattern representing the number "3" is stopped, and the right production pattern of the production pattern Hz on the liquid crystal display 42 is stopped. , the production pattern representing the number "3" is stopped.

[Stop display effect]
(E) in FIG. 53: A stop display effect is executed in synchronization with the stop display of the first special symbol. When the result of the internal lottery this time is non-winning and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a non-winning (lost) mode, the 7-segment production pattern of the 7-segment display device 200 is also the production of the liquid crystal display 42. Symbols Hz are similarly displayed in a non-win (lost) mode. That is, in the illustrated example, the central 7-segment effect pattern of the 7-segment display device 200 is the effect symbol representing the number "1", and the middle effect symbol of the liquid crystal display 42 is the number "1". The production pattern representing "1" is stopped. In this case, the combinations of the 7-segment effect pattern of the 7-segment display device 200 and the effect pattern Hz of the liquid crystal display device 42 are both "8" - "1" - "3", so the fluctuation this time is normal. It is expressed in the production that it corresponds to the "outside" of. At this time, the fourth symbol Z1 is stop-displayed in a mode (for example, white display color) corresponding to the loss.

Further, when the stop display effect is performed, the LED of the storage display area X1 is extinguished. As a result, it is possible to instruct the player in an intuitive and easy-to-understand manner that "variation of the special symbols has ended".

The above is an example of the variable display effect and the stop display effect (at the time of non-winning) performed for each variation. Through such an effect, it is possible to make the player feel a sense of anticipation for winning, and to clearly teach the result of the internal lottery in the effect.

[Example of production when hitting pattern 2]
54 to 57 are continuous diagrams showing examples of effects when the result of the normal symbol lottery in the non-shortening state corresponds to the winning symbol 2. FIG.

[Before starting the variable display effect]
(A) in FIG. 54: In the 7-segment display device 200, the 7-segment effect pattern is stopped and displayed in a displaced manner (“9”-“1”-“6”). In addition, on the liquid crystal display 42, the production pattern Hz is stopped and displayed in a displaced manner ("9"-"1"-"6").

Further, in the memory display device 300, since one LED of the first special symbol memory display area M1 is lit, it represents that the working memory number of the first special symbol is one, and the second special symbol memory display. Since all the LEDs in the area M2 are turned off, it means that the working memory number of the second special symbol is zero.

Furthermore, a normal symbol lottery area is arranged at the lower left of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 . A normal performance pattern Fz is displayed in the normal pattern lottery area, and the normal performance pattern Fz fluctuates in correspondence with the variable display of the normal pattern and stops in correspondence with the stop display of the normal pattern.

A plurality of figures (a circle figure, a triangle figure, a square figure, etc.) are scroll-displayed in the normal production pattern Fz. When the result of the normal symbol lottery in the non-time shortening state corresponds to the winning symbol 2, an effect that three circular figures are arranged is executed.
In the illustrated example, since three circular figures are not aligned as the normal performance pattern Fz, it means that the result of the normal pattern lottery in the non-shortening state does not correspond to the winning pattern 2.例文帳に追加

[Variation display effect start]
(B) in FIG. 54: Along with the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol, the variation of the 7-segment effect symbol of the 7-segment display device 200 is started, and the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 is scrolled and fluctuated to be displayed. The performance begins. Since the working memory number of the first special symbol is reduced by one with the start of the fluctuation, the lighting number of the LED in the first special symbol storage and display area M1 is reduced from one to zero. It should be noted that the variation of the first special symbol here is assumed to be a variation pattern to be missed.

In the normal effect pattern Fz at the bottom left of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, an effect is executed in which three circular figures are aligned. This indicates that the result of the normal symbol lottery in the non-shortening state corresponds to the winning symbol 2. At the stage before three normal production patterns Fz are aligned, a ready-to-win production is generated by the normal production patterns Fz, the left and right patterns of the normal production patterns Fz are displayed blinking, the middle patterns are scrolled at a visible speed, and finally. You may perform the production|presentation which aligns three normal production|presentation patterns Fz to . Further, when the normal effect symbol Fz is variably displayed, the number of payouts obtained by entering the starting device left start winning opening 454 may be displayed.

[Animal chance production]
Also, in the illustrated example, an effect is executed in which an animal character appears from the upper left position of the screen. This effect is executed when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of the winning symbol 2 in the normal symbol display device 33 . In this case, the variable starting prize winning device 28 opens for a long time (opens for 6.0 seconds) in spite of the non-shortening state.

[Occurrence of notice effect (first stage)]
(C) in FIG. 54: After a while from the start of the fluctuation, a pattern image showing some kind of character appears on the screen, and the forewarning effect is executed in such a manner that it stops at the center of the screen. In this example, for example, the pattern image appears from the left side of the screen and moves to the center of the screen as it is.

In addition, the animal chance production is continuing, and the production in which the animal character utters the line "Animal chance hit right" is being executed. In the illustrated example, the variable starting prize winning device 28 is in operation, and the game balls are flowing down toward the variable starting prize winning device 28 .

[Occurrence of notice effect (second stage)]
(D) in FIG. 55: Following the first-stage foretelling effect, the second-stage foretelling effect is executed. In the illustrated example, another pattern image additionally appears from the right end of the screen and is displayed overlapping the previously displayed pattern image. By executing such a notice effect, it is possible to make the player feel a sense of anticipation that it may become a reach.

In addition, the animal chance production is continuing, and the production in which the animal character utters the line "Animal chance hit right" is being executed. In the illustrated example, a game ball has entered the variable starting winning device 28 in operation.

[Left production design stop]
(E) in FIG. 55: Following the advance notice effect, the left 7-segment effect pattern of the 7-segment display device 200 is stopped, and the effect pattern representing the number "2" is stopped. The production pattern representing the number "2" is stopped as the left production pattern.

Also, when the game ball enters the variable starting prize winning device 28, the number of second special symbols stored increases by one, so that one LED in the second special symbol storage display area M2 lights up. When a game ball enters the variable starting prize winning device 28, it is possible to execute an effect at the time of ball entry (such as an effect of displaying OK character information).
The variable starting prize device 28 is deactivated after a certain period of time (6.0 seconds) has passed, or when a specified number of prizes (for example, one) has been won. In the illustrated example, one game ball has entered the variable starting winning device 28, so the variable starting winning device 28 is closed. When the variable starting prize winning device 28 is closed, the animal chance presentation ends. Note that the specified number may be two or more.

[Exploration challenge icon display effect]
Triggered by the game ball entering the variable starting winning device 28, a search challenge icon IC is displayed on the left side of the screen. When a plurality of game balls enter the variable starting prize winning device 28, character information such as "x2" or "x3" corresponding to the number of entered balls can be displayed next to the search challenge icon IC. can. The search challenge icon IC suggests that the search challenge effect will be executed after that. The search challenge icon IC is continuously displayed until the second special symbol changes.

[Right production pattern stop]
(F) in FIG. 55: Next, as the 7-segment production pattern on the right side of the 7-segment display device 200, the production pattern representing the number "4" is stopped, and the right production pattern of the production pattern Hz on the liquid crystal display 42 is stopped. , the production pattern representing the number "4" is stopped.

[Stop display effect]
(G) in FIG. 56: A stop display effect is executed in synchronization with the stop display of the first special symbol. When the result of the internal lottery this time is non-winning and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a non-winning (lost) mode, the 7-segment production pattern of the 7-segment display device 200 is also the production of the liquid crystal display 42. Symbols Hz are similarly displayed in a non-win (lost) mode. In the illustrated example, the central 7-segment effect pattern of the 7-segment display device 200 is stopped, and the middle effect pattern of the effect pattern Hz on the liquid crystal display 42 is the number "3." ” is stopped.

[Variation display effect start]
(H) in FIG. 56: Along with the start of fluctuation of the second special pattern, the fluctuation of the 7-segment effect pattern of the 7-segment display device 200 is started, and the fluctuation display effect is produced by the scroll fluctuation of the effect pattern Hz of the liquid crystal display 42. be started. Since the working memory number of the second special symbol is reduced by one with the start of the fluctuation, the number of lighting of the LEDs in the second special symbol storage display area M2 is reduced from one to zero. It should be noted that the variation of the second special symbol here is assumed to have selected a variation pattern corresponding to the small winning. Here, when the control of preferential digestion of the second special symbol is employed, the storage of the second special symbol is preferentially digested. On the other hand, when adopting the control of the regular digestion of the special symbols, the variation of the special symbols is executed in the order of memory. In the illustrated example, since there is no memory of the first special symbol, the variation of the second special symbol is executed regardless of which control is employed.

[Exploration challenge production starts]
When the variation of the second special symbol is started, the search challenge icon IC disappears (is consumed), and the search challenge effect is started. Also, in the illustrated example, an effect is being executed in which an animal character utters the line "exploration challenge".

[Left production design stop]
(I) in FIG. 56: After a certain period of time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the left 7-segment display device 200 has stopped the 7-segment production pattern representing the number "5", and the liquid crystal display 42 has a production pattern. A production pattern representing the number "5" is stopped as a left production pattern of Hz.

[Exploration challenge production continues]
The search challenge production is continuously executed. In the illustrated example, an effect is being executed in which the hermit character utters the line "I'm going to find an animal." This means that if an animal can be found, it corresponds to a small win (or big win).

[Right production pattern stop]
(J) in FIG. 57: Next, as the 7-segment production pattern on the right side of the 7-segment display device 200, the production pattern representing the number "2" is stopped, and the right production pattern of the production pattern Hz on the liquid crystal display 42 is stopped. , the production pattern representing the number "2" is stopped.

[Mid-stage design stop]
(K) in FIG. 57: A stop display effect is executed in synchronization with the stop display of the second special symbol. When the result of the internal lottery this time is a small win, and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of a small win, the 7-segment production pattern of the 7-segment display device 200 is also the production pattern Hz of the liquid crystal display 42. Similarly, a stop display effect is performed in the form of a small hit. In the illustrated example, the central 7-segment effect pattern of the 7-segment display device 200 is the effect symbol representing the alphabet "A". ” is stopped. In addition, animal characters are displayed in large sizes on the liquid crystal display 42 . As a result, it is possible to convey to the player that ``you have won a small win via the animal chance'' or that ``you were able to obtain a successful result in the search challenge presentation''. Further, the fourth symbol Z2 is stopped and displayed in a mode corresponding to a small hit. After that, a small winning game is executed.

58 and 59 are diagrams showing a first production example when the search challenge icon is not displayed.
The first example of effect is an example of effect when the search challenge icon is exceptionally not displayed even in a scene where the search challenge icon is displayed.

[Before starting the variable display effect]
(A) in FIG. 58: In the 7-segment display device 200, the 7-segment effect pattern is stopped and displayed in a displaced manner (“3”-“4”-“5”). In addition, on the liquid crystal display 42, the production pattern Hz is stopped and displayed in a displaced manner ("3"-"4"-"5"). Furthermore, at the lower left of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, the normal effect symbol Fz is stopped and displayed in a lost mode (a mode indicating that it does not correspond to the winning symbol 2).

[Variation display effect start]
(B) in FIG. 58: Along with the start of variation of the first special symbol, the variation of the 7-segment effect symbol of the 7-segment display device 200 is started, and the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 is scrolled and fluctuated to be displayed. The performance begins.

At the lower left of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, the normal effect symbol Fz is stopped and displayed in a winning mode (a mode indicating that the symbol corresponds to the winning symbol 2).

[Animal chance production]
Also, in the illustrated example, an effect is executed in which an animal character appears from the upper left position of the screen. This effect is executed when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of the winning symbol 2 in the normal symbol display device 33 . In this case, the variable starting prize winning device 28 opens for a long time (opens for 6.0 seconds) in spite of the non-shortening state.

(C) in FIG. 58: The animal chance production continues, and an production is being executed in which the animal character utters the line "Animal chance, hit right." In the illustrated example, the variable starting prize winning device 28 is in operation, and the game balls are flowing down toward the variable starting prize winning device 28 .

(D) in FIG. 59: The animal chance production is continuing, and the production is executed in which the animal character utters the line "Animal chance, hit right." In the illustrated example, a game ball has entered the variable starting winning device 28 in operation.

[Left production design stop]
(E) in FIG. 59: The effect pattern representing the number "6" is stopped as the 7-segment effect pattern on the left side of the 7-segment display device 200, and the number is displayed as the left effect pattern of the effect pattern Hz on the liquid crystal display 42. The production pattern representing "6" is stopped.

Also, when the game ball enters the variable starting prize winning device 28, the number of second special symbols stored increases by one, so that one LED in the second special symbol storage display area M2 lights up.

[Hiding the exploration challenge icon]
Normally, the search challenge icon IC should be displayed at this timing, but the search challenge icon IC is not displayed here. The reason for this is that the number of special fluctuations remains (because the number of special fluctuations is a value greater than 0).

[Right production pattern stop]
(F) in FIG. 59: Next, as the 7-segment production pattern on the right side of the 7-segment display device 200, the production pattern representing the number "5" is stopped, and the right production pattern of the production pattern Hz on the liquid crystal display 42 is stopped. , the production pattern representing the number "5" is stopped.

After that, the variation of the first special symbol is completed, and then the variation of the second special symbol is started. However, when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a loss, if the number of special variations remains, the variation of the second special symbol becomes a short variation. Therefore, in such a case, not only is the search challenge icon not displayed, but also the search challenge effect is not executed.

60 to 62 are diagrams showing a second rendering example when the search challenge icon is not displayed.
The second example of effect is an example of effect in which the search challenge icon is not displayed, but a special icon (extreme heat icon) is displayed instead.

[Before starting the variable display effect]
(A) in FIG. 60: In the 7-segment display device 200, the 7-segment effect pattern is stopped and displayed in a displaced manner (“6”-“7”-“8”). In addition, on the liquid crystal display 42, the performance symbol Hz is stopped and displayed in a displaced manner ("6"-"7"-"8"). Furthermore, at the lower left of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, the normal effect symbol Fz is stopped and displayed in a lost mode (a mode indicating that it does not correspond to the winning symbol 2).

Further, in the memory display device 300, since two LEDs of the first special symbol memory display area M1 are lit, it represents that the working memory number of the first special symbol is two, and the second special symbol memory display. Since all the LEDs in the area M2 are turned off, it means that the working memory number of the second special symbol is zero.

[Variation display effect start]
(B) in FIG. 60: Along with the start of the variation of the first special symbol, the variation of the 7-segment effect symbol of the 7-segment display device 200 is started, and the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 is scrolled and fluctuated to be displayed. The performance begins. Since the working memory number of the first special symbol is reduced by one with the start of the fluctuation, the number of lighting of the LEDs in the first special symbol storage and display area M1 is reduced from two to one. It should be noted that the variation of the first special symbol here is assumed to be a variation pattern to be missed.

At the lower left of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, the normal effect symbol Fz is stopped and displayed in a winning mode (a mode indicating that the symbol corresponds to the winning symbol 2).

[Animal chance production]
Also, in the illustrated example, an effect is executed in which an animal character appears from the upper left position of the screen. This effect is executed when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of the winning symbol 2 in the normal symbol display device 33 . In this case, the variable starting prize winning device 28 opens for a long time (opens for 6.0 seconds) in spite of the non-shortening state.

(C) in FIG. 60: The animal chance production continues, and an production is being executed in which the animal character utters the line "Animal chance, hit right." In the illustrated example, the variable starting prize winning device 28 is in operation, and the game balls are flowing down toward the variable starting prize winning device 28 .

(D) in FIG. 61: The animal chance production is continuing, and the production is executed in which the animal character utters the line "Animal chance, hit right." In the illustrated example, a game ball has entered the variable starting winning device 28 in operation.

[Left production design stop]
(E) in FIG. 61: The effect pattern representing the number "6" is stopped as the 7-segment effect pattern on the left side of the 7-segment display device 200, and the number is displayed as the left effect pattern of the effect pattern Hz on the liquid crystal display 42. The production pattern representing "6" is stopped.

Also, when the game ball enters the variable starting prize winning device 28, the number of second special symbols stored increases by one, so that one LED in the second special symbol storage display area M2 lights up.

[Hiding the exploration challenge icon]
Normally, the search challenge icon IC would be displayed at this timing, but the search challenge icon IC is not displayed here. Instead, a special icon IC2 (extreme heat icon) is displayed here. The reason for this is that the memory (reservation) of the first special symbol includes the memory of the big hit.

[Right production pattern stop]
(F) in FIG. 61: Next, as the 7-segment production pattern on the right side of the 7-segment display device 200, the production pattern representing the number "4" is stopped, and the right production pattern of the production pattern Hz on the liquid crystal display 42 is stopped. , the production pattern representing the number "4" is stopped.

[Stop display effect]
(G) in FIG. 62: In synchronization with the stop display of the first special symbol, a stop display effect is executed. When the result of the internal lottery this time is non-winning and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a non-winning (lost) mode, the 7-segment production pattern of the 7-segment display device 200 is also the production of the liquid crystal display 42. Symbols Hz are similarly displayed in a non-win (lost) mode. In the illustrated example, the central 7-segment production pattern of the 7-segment display device 200 is the production pattern representing the number "9", and the production pattern Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 is the number "9". ” is stopped.

[Variation display effect start]
(H) in FIG. 62: When the winning order digestion control is adopted, the first special symbol changes first. Then, along with the start of the variation of the first special symbol, the variation of the 7-segment effect symbol of the 7-segment display device 200 is started, and the variation display effect is started by scrolling the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 . Since the working memory number of the first special symbol is reduced by one with the start of the fluctuation, the lighting number of the LED in the first special symbol storage and display area M1 is reduced from one to zero. In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the big hit is selected for the variation of the second special symbol here. Also, in the illustrated example, an effect is being executed in which an animal character utters the line "extreme heat".

(I) in FIG. 62: After this, the ready-to-win effect is executed, and the effect of a big win is executed. When there is a big win in the memory of the first special pattern, even if the search challenge icon IC is displayed when the memory of the second special pattern increases, the search challenge icon IC is used because the big win game is executed before that. If you move to the time reduction state after that, there is a possibility that the search challenge effect will not be executed. Therefore, in such a case, the special icon IC2 is displayed instead of the search challenge icon IC.

[During the big role]
FIGS. 63 and 64 are continuous diagrams partially showing an example of an effect during a big win executed during a big win game. It should be noted that the following effects during the big role are effects executed on the liquid crystal display device 42 .

[Jackpot game start]
(A) in FIG. 63: When a jackpot game is started, for example, character information such as "BIG BONUS" is displayed on the screen, and a unique effect image (for example, a female character) is displayed during the jackpot game. .

["Right-handed" display during heavy duty]
In addition, in this embodiment, since the first variable winning device 30 is arranged in the right part of the game area 8a, the right part of the game area 8a is specified as the shooting position (shooting direction) of the game ball during a big win. I'm doing it. Therefore, under the control of the main control CPU 72 , the firing position designation display lamp 38 f is lit and displayed, and a firing position designation command representing “right hitting” is transmitted to the effect control device 124 . In response to this, guidance information (an arrow indicating the right direction, letters of "right hitting", etc.) is displayed on the display screen to prompt "right hitting" on the effect control by the effect control CPU 126).

[1st round]
(B) in FIG. 63: When the first round of the jackpot game is started, for example, the character information "BIG BONUS" and three circle marks are displayed in the upper left part of the screen. The leftmost ○ mark is displayed in red (hatched with oblique lines), and the remaining two ○ marks are displayed in white. As a result, the number of rounds in which a ball can be obtained is 3, the current round is the first round among the 3 rounds, and a circle mark is displayed each time a round in which a ball can be obtained progresses. The player can be instructed to be displayed in red.

Here, the number of "○ marks" increases according to the winning symbols. For example, if the winning design is the "first winning design" or the "second winning design", the number of "○ marks" is "3", but the winning design is the "third winning design". In this case, the number of "circles" is "2". In addition, when the winning design is the "fourth winning design", the number of "○ marks" is "9", and when the winning design is the "fifth winning design", the "○ mark" is displayed. is "6", and when the winning symbol is the "sixth winning symbol", the number of "○" is "3".

[3rd round]
(C) in FIG. 63: After that, the jackpot game progresses smoothly, and, for example, when the game shifts to the third round, for example, all the three circle marks are displayed in red. Thereby, it is possible to teach the player that all the rounds in which the ball can be obtained are completed in the third round.

[Time shortened state rushing effect]
(D) in FIG. 64: Then, using the end time (ending time) of the jackpot game, an effect is executed in which character information such as "Enter drive mode!" is displayed. Thus, the player can be informed that the "drive mode" is about to start. In addition, an arrow indicating the right direction is displayed together with text information such as ``Keep playing right,'' so that the player can be taught that the game proceeds with hitting right even in the ``drive mode''.

Here, during the ending production, a notification such as ``Be careful not to forget to take out the prepaid card'' is given to remind the user to forget to take out the prepaid card, or ``Be careful not to get addicted to the game'' to prevent addiction to the game. You may make it alert|report.

[Jackpot game end, time shortened]
(E) in FIG. 64: When the jackpot game ends and the internal state (game state) is set to the time reduction state, the stay mode is set to the "drive mode", and the background image is the car in which the woman is riding. It is changed to an image that expresses how it runs on the ground. As a result, it is possible to teach the player that the current internal state (game state) is a time reduction state different from the normal state.

[Time-saving production]
In this way, when the game is progressing in the time shortening state, the time-saving middle production (advantageous game state production) for displaying the background image corresponding to the time shortening state (advantageous game state) is executed.

[Right-handed suggestion production]
Also, in the upper part of the screen, an effect suggesting hitting to the right is being executed. In the right-handed suggestion effect, right-handed character information and a right-pointing arrow symbol are displayed on the upper left of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 . Note that such a right-handing suggestion effect may be continuously executed when the game state is the time shortening state, or may be executed only at the start of the time shortening state. By executing such an effect, the player can be urged to "hit to the right".

[Remaining count display effect]
Furthermore, at the lower left of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, a remaining count display effect is being executed. In the remaining number display effect, a rectangular area is provided at the bottom left of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and the remaining number of times that the game can be played in the drive mode is displayed in the rectangular area. In addition, in the illustrated example, the information of "remaining 10 times" is displayed. The remaining number of times is decremented by 1 each time the second special symbol changes and stops in the time shortening state, and is decremented by 1 each time the second special symbol changes and stops in the non-time shortening state. Therefore, the remaining number of times is not subtracted even if the first special symbol fluctuates and stops in the time shortening state or the non-time shortening state.

[Example of production in drive mode (time reduction state)]
65 to 67 are continuous diagrams showing examples of effects in the drive mode.

(A) in FIG. 65: In the drive mode, the background image is changed to an image representing a vehicle in which a woman is riding on the ground. The combination of the 7-segment effect patterns displayed on the 7-segment display device 200 is the winning number of "7"-"7"-"7", and the combination of the effect pattern Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 is "7"-"7". ”-“7”. This shows the outcome at the time of winning. Also, in the upper part of the screen, a right-handing suggestion effect is being executed, and such a right-handing suggestion performance is continuously performed when the game state is the time reduction state.

[Start of fluctuation of special symbols]
(B) in FIG. 65: When the first special symbol is hit for the first time, the memory of the first special symbol is often stored, and the memory of the second special symbol is generally not stored. In the illustrated example, one memory of the first special symbol is accumulated (one LED of the first special symbol storage display area M1 is lit). Therefore, when the drive mode is entered in such a situation, the first special symbol is variably displayed. In addition, when the memory of the first special symbol is not stored, the variation of the second special symbol is first executed by the player executing a right-handed stroke. Then, when the variable display of the first special pattern is started, the 7-segment production pattern of the 7-segment display device 200 starts to fluctuate accordingly, and the production pattern Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 and the fourth pattern Z1 also fluctuate. to start. Here, in the internal lottery regarding the first special symbol, it is assumed that it corresponds to the loss.

[End of variation of the first special symbol]
(C) in FIG. 65: When the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a lost state, the 7-segment effect symbol on the 7-segment display device 200, the effect symbol Hz on the liquid crystal display 42, and the 4th symbol on the liquid crystal display 42 Z1 is also stopped and displayed in a different manner. During this time, the player hits to the right, a plurality of game balls pass through the start gate 20, the variable start prize winning device 28 is opened, and four game balls enter the right start prize opening 28b. . In this case, four second special symbol memories are stored (all four LEDs of the second special symbol display area M2 are lit).

Here, since the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of times is not subtracted and displayed. Specifically, the display of the remaining number of times remains 10 times remaining.

(D) in FIG. 66: Since the memory of the second special symbol is digested with priority over the memory of the first special symbol, the internal lottery is executed next using the memory of the second special symbol. Then, when the variable display of the second special pattern is started, the 7-segment production pattern of the 7-segment display device 200 starts to fluctuate accordingly, and the production pattern Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 and the fourth pattern Z2 also fluctuate. to start. Here, in the internal lottery regarding the second special symbol, it is assumed that a small hit is won.

[Small hit start, 2nd big prize opening open]
(E) in FIG. 66: Then, when the second special symbol is stop-displayed in the form of a small win, the 7-segment effect symbol of the 7-segment display device 200 (combination of “5”-“2”-“6”) , the production pattern Hz (combination of "5"-"2"-"6") on the liquid crystal display 42, and the fourth pattern Z2 (green display color) on the liquid crystal display 42 are also stop-displayed in the form of a small hit. . As a result, a small winning game is started, and the second big winning opening 31b is opened. Then, an effect is executed in which the car in which the female character is riding speeds up and advances to the right side of the screen.

Here, since the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of times is subtracted and displayed. Specifically, the remaining number of times is displayed as 9 remaining times.

(F) in FIG. 66: When the small winning game is started, an effect is executed in which the hermit character utters the line "Aim for the lower right attacker." As a result, it is possible to inform the player that the game ball must enter the second variable prize winning device 31 .

[Pass through specific area]
(G) in FIG. 67: The second variable winning device 31 is shifted to the open state due to the small winning game, the game ball passes through the specific area 31x, and the winning symbol at the time of the small winning is the sixth winning symbol. do. In this example, an effect is executed in which a female character riding in a car raises a heart mark with the letter V drawn on it and utters a line such as "You did it! It's a BIG BONUS!!". As a result, it is possible to inform the player that the game ball has passed through the specific area 31x and that a big hit game (BIG BONUS) is about to start.

[Small win ends, big win game starts]
(H) in FIG. 67: After that, the small winning game ends, and the second variable winning device 31 (second big winning opening 31b) is closed. Also, when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small winning game, the big winning game is started. In this example, a female character peculiar to the jackpot game appears, character information such as "BIG BONUS" is displayed, and an effect is executed in which the female character utters similar lines. In addition, the display screen displays an arrow pointing to the right and text information such as ``Keep right-handed'', so that the player can be taught that the big win game will proceed with right-handed.

After that, the process proceeds to (B) in FIG. 63, the same effect during the big win game as described above is started, and the big win game progresses. For example, when the winning symbol at the time of the small hit with respect to the second special symbol corresponds to the sixth winning symbol, it is possible to obtain balls for three rounds substantially. In addition, when the jackpot game is executed in the drive mode, it is possible to execute a special effect during the winning in the drive mode.

Figures 68 and 69 are continuous diagrams showing examples of effects when the second special symbol changes in the drive mode in the non-time reduction state. Such a situation occurs mainly when the memory of the second special symbol is accumulated even though the final variation of the time shortening state is delayed.

Here, it is assumed that there are four memories of the second special symbol before the start of variation of the second special symbol. For this reason, production|presentation in time saving is continuously performed. In addition, as the remaining number of times display effect, information of "remaining 4 times" is displayed. However, the right hitting suggestion production is not executed.

[During display of special symbols]
(A) in FIG. 68: When the variable display of the second special symbol is started in the drive mode in the non-shortening state, the 7-segment effect symbol of the 7-segment display device 200 starts to vary accordingly, and is displayed on the liquid crystal display. The effect pattern Hz of the device 42 and the fourth pattern Z2 also start to fluctuate. In addition, since the situation here is not the time shortening state, even if the starting gate 20 is allowed to pass through, the probability of the winning symbol 2 in the normal symbol lottery is low. Therefore, it is difficult for the variable starting prize winning device 28 to shift to the open state, and basically the second special symbol cannot be stored. Therefore, the drive mode in such a non-time-reduction state becomes a chance zone in which the second special symbol fluctuates up to four times.

[Stop display effect]
(B) in FIG. 68: Here, it is assumed that a small hit is won in the internal lottery for the second special symbol. Then, when the second special symbol is stop-displayed in the mode of a small win, the 7-segment effect symbol ("2"-"2"-"3" combination) of the 7-segment display device 200 and the effect of the liquid crystal display 42 The pattern Hz (combination of "2"-"2"-"3") and the fourth pattern Z2 (green display color) on the liquid crystal display 42 are also stopped and displayed in a small winning manner. In this case, an effect is executed in which the animal character holds up a "mark with the number 7 displayed".

Here, since the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of times is subtracted and displayed. Specifically, the remaining number of times is displayed as three remaining times.

[Small hit start, 2nd big prize opening open]
(C) in FIG. 68: Then, when the small winning game is started, the second big prize opening 31b is opened, and the car in which the female character is riding speeds up and advances to the right side of the screen. executed. At this time, an effect is executed in which the animal character is left behind.

[Pass through specific area]
(D) in FIG. 69: The second variable prize winning device 31 is shifted to the open state due to the small winning game, the game ball passes through the specific area 31x, and the winning pattern at the time of the small winning is the fourth winning pattern. do. In this example, an effect is executed in which a female character riding in a car raises a heart mark with the letter V drawn on it and utters a line such as "You did it! It's a BIG BONUS!!". As a result, it is possible to inform the player that the game ball has passed through the specific area 31x and that a big hit game (BIG BONUS) is about to start.

[Small win ends, big win game starts]
(E) in FIG. 69: After that, the small winning game ends, and the second variable winning device 31 (second big winning opening 31b) is closed. Also, when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small winning game, the big winning game is started. In this example, a female character peculiar to the jackpot game appears, character information such as "BIG BONUS" is displayed, and an effect is executed in which the female character utters similar lines. In addition, the display screen displays an arrow pointing to the right and text information such as ``Keep right-handed'', so that the player can be taught that the big win game will proceed with right-handed. After that, the process proceeds to (B) in FIG. 63, the same effect during the big win game as described above is started, and the big win game progresses.

FIGS. 70 to 72 are continuous diagrams showing examples of effects when the drive mode in the non-shortening state is shifted to the normal mode in the non-shortening state.
Such a situation occurs mainly when the final variation of the time shortening state is lost, the memory of the second special pattern is accumulated, and further, the memory of the second special pattern is all lost.

Here, it is assumed that there are four memories of the second special symbol before the start of variation of the second special symbol. For this reason, production|presentation in time saving is continuously performed. In addition, as the remaining number of times display effect, information of "remaining 4 times" is displayed. However, the right hitting suggestion production is not executed.

[During display of special symbols]
(A) in FIG. 70: When the variable display of the second special symbol is started in the drive mode in the non-shortening state, the 7-segment effect symbol of the 7-segment display device 200 starts to vary accordingly, and is displayed on the liquid crystal display. The effect pattern Hz of the device 42 and the fourth pattern Z2 also start to fluctuate. When shifting from the time shortening state to the non-shortening state, the first variation of the second special symbol becomes a short variation by a special variation pattern (variation pattern having a variation time of 1 second).

[Stop display effect]
(B) in FIG. 70: Here, in the internal lottery regarding the second special symbol, it is assumed that it corresponds to a loss. Then, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a lost manner, the 7-segment effect symbol (combination of "1"-"2"-"3") of the 7-segment display device 200 and the effect symbol of the liquid crystal display 42 are displayed. Hz (combination of "1"-"2"-"3") and the fourth pattern Z2 on the liquid crystal display 42 are also stopped and displayed in a different manner. Here, since the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of times is subtracted and displayed. Specifically, the remaining number of times is displayed as three remaining times.

[During display of special symbols]
(C) in FIG. 70: When the variable display of the second special symbol is started in the drive mode in the non-shortening state, the 7-segment effect symbol of the 7-segment display device 200 starts to vary accordingly, and is displayed on the liquid crystal display. The effect pattern Hz of the device 42 and the fourth pattern Z2 also start to fluctuate. When shifting from the time shortening state to the non-time shortening state, the second variation of the second special symbol becomes a short variation by a special variation pattern (variation pattern having a variation time of 1 second).

[Stop display effect]
(D) in FIG. 71: Here, in the internal lottery regarding the second special symbol, it is assumed to fall under the loss. Then, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a lost manner, the 7-segment effect symbol ("2"-"4"-"6" combination) of the 7-segment display device 200 and the effect symbol of the liquid crystal display 42 are displayed. Hz (combination of "2"-"4"-"6") and the fourth pattern Z2 on the liquid crystal display 42 are also stopped and displayed in a different manner. Here, since the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of times is subtracted and displayed. Specifically, the remaining number of times is displayed as two remaining times.

[During display of special symbols]
(E) in FIG. 71: When the variable display of the second special symbol is started in the drive mode in the non-shortening state, the 7-segment effect symbol of the 7-segment display device 200 starts to vary accordingly, and is displayed on the liquid crystal display. The effect pattern Hz of the device 42 and the fourth pattern Z2 also start to fluctuate. When shifting from the time shortening state to the non-shortening state, the third variation of the second special symbol becomes a short variation by a special variation pattern (variation pattern having a variation time of 1 second).

[Stop display effect]
(F) in FIG. 71: Here, in the internal lottery regarding the second special symbol, it is assumed to fall under the loss. Then, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a lost manner, the 7-segment effect symbol (combination of "3"-"5"-"8") of the 7-segment display device 200 and the effect symbol of the liquid crystal display 42 are displayed. Hz (combination of "3"-"5"-"8") and the fourth pattern Z2 on the liquid crystal display 42 are also stopped and displayed in a different manner. Here, since the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of times is subtracted and displayed. Specifically, the remaining number of times is displayed as one remaining time.

[During display of special symbols]
(G) in FIG. 72: When the variable display of the second special symbol is started in the drive mode in the non-shortening state, the 7-segment effect symbol of the 7-segment display device 200 starts to vary accordingly, and is displayed on the liquid crystal display. The effect pattern Hz of the device 42 and the fourth pattern Z2 also start to fluctuate. When shifting from the time shortening state to the non-time shortening state, the fourth variation of the second special symbol becomes a short variation by a special variation pattern (variation pattern having a variation time of 1 second).

[Stop display effect]
(H) in FIG. 72: Here, in the internal lottery regarding the second special symbol, it is assumed that it corresponds to a loss. Then, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a lost manner, the 7-segment effect symbol ("4"-"5"-"6" combination) of the 7-segment display device 200 and the effect symbol of the liquid crystal display 42 are displayed. Hz (combination of "4"-"5"-"6") and the fourth pattern Z2 on the liquid crystal display 42 are also stopped and displayed in the wrong mode. Here, since the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of times is subtracted and displayed. Specifically, the display of the remaining number of times is 0 remaining times. When the fourth variation of the second special symbol ends, the drive mode in the non-time reduction state ends.

(I) in FIG. 72: When the player hits left and the first special symbol fluctuates, the fluctuation display effect in the normal mode is executed.

When the memory (reservation) of the second special symbol is accumulated to the maximum in the final variation of the time shortening state, it becomes such an example of production, but the memory of the second special symbol is maximized in the final variation of the time shortening state. If it is not stored up to that point, the normal mode is entered while the number of special variations of the second special symbol remains.

Next, an example of a control method for specifically realizing the above effects will be described. The above-mentioned variable display effect and reach effect, advance notice effect before reach occurrence, effect during big role, effect using liquid crystal display 42, 7 segment display device 200, storage display device 300, time saving effect, right hitting suggestion effect, remaining number of times Display effects and the like are all controlled through the following control processing.

[Production control processing]
FIG. 73 is a flow chart showing a procedure example of the effect control process executed by the effect control CPU 126. As shown in FIG. This effect control process is executed in a timer interrupt process (interrupt management process) separately from reset start (main) process (not shown), for example. The effect control CPU 126 generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined interrupt cycle (for example, a cycle of several tens of μs to several ms) during execution of the reset start process, and executes the timer interrupt process.

Production control processing includes command reception processing (step S400), working memory production management processing (step S401), production design management processing (step S402), other production processing during time reduction and pseudo time reduction (step S402a), 7 segment display device Effect management process (step S403), normal symbol effect management process (step S403a), second special symbol winning process (step S403b), display output process (step S404), lamp drive process (step S406), sound drive process ( Step S408), effect random number update processing (step S410), and other processing (step S412). The basic flow of the effect control process will be described below along with each process.

Step S400: In the command reception process, the effect control CPU 126 receives a command for effect transmitted from the main control CPU 72. Also, the effect control CPU 126 analyzes the received commands and stores them in the command buffer area of the RAM 130 by type. It should be noted that the production commands sent from the main control CPU 72 include, for example, a special target determination production command, (special symbol) production command when the number of working memories increases, (special pattern) production command when the number of working memories decreases, start Winning sound control command, demonstration effect command, lottery result command, variation pattern command, variation start command, stop pattern command, pattern stop command, state designation command, round number command, firing position designation command, error notification command, jackpot There are an end effect command, a variation pattern destination determination command, a stop display time end command, a number cutting counter command, various error commands, a variable start winning device long open start command, a special variation number designation command, and the like.

Step S<b>401 : In the operation storage performance management process, the performance control CPU 126 controls execution of performance using the storage display device 300 . The contents of the operation memory effect management process will be further described later with reference to another drawing.

Step S402: In the effect symbol management process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the contents of the variable display effect and the stop display effect using the effect symbol Hz and the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2, and controls the contents of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable It also controls the contents of the presentation when the winning device 31 is opened and closed. In addition, in this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects effect patterns of various advance notice effects (previous notice effects before occurrence of reach, notice effects after occurrence of reach, etc.). Thus, in the production pattern management process, the production control CPU 126 controls the production contents displayed on the liquid crystal display device 42 (the production design Hz, the fourth patterns Z1, Z2, the production contents related to the production during the big role, and the contents of various advance notice productions). perform a process to determine The specific contents of the processing will be described later.

Step S402a: The effect control CPU 126 executes other effect processing during time saving and pseudo time saving. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of determining the contents of effects related to the right-hand hitting suggesting effect, the remaining count display effect, and the like. The specific contents of the processing will be described later.

Step S403: In the 7-segment display device effect management process, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of controlling the 7-segment display device 200 based on the effect content determined in the effect pattern management process. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes processing for determining the content of the effect to be displayed on the 7-segment display device 200 (contents related to the 7-segment effect symbol). Although it is preferable that the effect symbol Hz and the 7-segment effect symbol basically perform the same operation, different operations may be performed. When performing different actions, for example, the timing at which the performance design Hz and the 7-segment performance design stop may be different, or the design to be stopped may be different.

Step S403a: In the normal symbol effect management process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the effect (animal chance effect) when a chance state for the second special symbol occurs. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting an effect pattern for executing the animal chance effect in the period from when the variable start-up prize device long open start command is received until the variable start-up prize device 28 is closed. do.

In addition, when the normal pattern fluctuates in the non-time shortening state, the production control CPU 126 executes a variable display production of the normal production pattern Fz (simple loss fluctuation, reach fluctuation, etc.), and the result of the normal pattern lottery is the winning pattern 1. When it is applicable, the normal production pattern Fz is stopped in the manner of losing (discrete eyes) is executed, and when the result of the normal pattern lottery corresponds to the winning pattern 2, the normal production pattern Fz is stopped in a win mode (a mode in which three circle figures are aligned). The production using the normal production pattern Fz may be always executed in the non-shortening state, or may be executed only in certain cases.

Step S403b: In the second special symbol winning process, the effect control CPU 126 executes the process of controlling the effect when the game ball enters the start winning hole corresponding to the second special symbol.

Step S404: In the display output process, the effect control CPU 126 gives the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) basic control information of the effect contents (for example, the number of working memories of each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol , operating memory effect pattern number, pre-reading forewarning effect pattern number, fluctuation effect pattern number, fluctuation time forewarning effect number, background pattern number, etc.). Thereby, the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146 and VDP 152) controls the display operation of the liquid crystal display 42 based on the instructed effect contents (effect executing means).

Step S<b>406 : In the lamp driving process, the effect control CPU 126 outputs a control signal to the lamp driving circuit 132 . In response to this, the lamp drive circuit 132 drives (turns on or off, blinks, changes luminance gradation, etc.) the various lamps 46 to 52, the board lamp 53, and the like based on the control signal.

Step S408: In the next sound driving process, the effect control CPU 126 sends the effect contents (for example, during the variable display effect, during the reach effect, during the mode transition effect, during the jackpot effect, BGM, voice data, etc.) to the sound drive circuit 134. instruct. As a result, the speakers 54, 55, and 56 output sounds corresponding to the content of the presentation.

Step S410: In effect random number update processing, the effect control CPU 126 updates various effect random numbers in the counter area of the RAM 130. FIG. The effect random number includes, for example, a random number used for advance notice selection, a random number used for a normal background change lottery (effect lottery), and the like.

Step S412: In other processes, for example, the effect control CPU 126 outputs a control signal to the driving IC of the movable body 40f. The movable body 40f operates using the movable body motor 57 as a drive source, and performs effects in synchronism with the image display by the liquid crystal display 42 or independently.

Through the effect control processing described above, the effect control CPU 126 can comprehensively control the effect contents in the pachinko machine 1 . Next, the contents of the effect symbol management process executed in the effect control process will be described.

[Working memory presentation management process]
FIG. 74 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the operation storage performance management process. The contents will be described below according to the procedure example.

Step S700: First, the production control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the production command for increasing the number of working memories is received from the main control CPU 72 . Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the effect command at the time of increasing the number of working memories is saved. When it is confirmed that the production command for increasing the number of working memories is saved (step S700: Yes), the production control CPU 126 executes step S702. In addition, when it cannot be confirmed that the production command at the time of increasing the number of working memories is saved (step S700: No), the production control CPU 126 does not execute step S702.

Step S702: The effect control CPU 126 executes the effect selection process when the number of working memories is increased. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the effect of lighting one LED in the first special symbol storage/display area M1 or one LED in the second special symbol storage/display area M2. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 can determine the effect pattern and effect scenario of the color change effect (for example, the display color of the LED in the storage display area X1 and the display color of the LED in the effect display area X2). can.

Step S704: The production control CPU 126 confirms whether or not it has received a production command from the main control CPU 72 when the number of working memories is reduced. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130, and confirms whether or not the effect command is stored when the number of working memories is reduced. When it is confirmed that the production command is saved when the number of working memories is reduced (step S704: Yes), the production control CPU 126 executes step S706. In addition, when it cannot be confirmed that the production command is saved when the number of working memories decreases (step S704: No), the production control CPU 126 does not execute step S706.

Step S706: The effect control CPU 126 executes effect selection processing when the number of working memories is reduced. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the effect of turning off one of the LEDs of the first special symbol storage and display area M1 or the second special symbol storage and display area M2 corresponding to the lottery element consumed by the internal lottery. , to select an effect for lighting the LED of the storage display area X1. It should be noted that the LED in the storage display area X1 selects an effect of extinguishing when the variation of the special symbol ends. In addition, when the LED of the effect display area X2 is lit, the LED of the effect display area X2 is also selected to be extinguished when the variation of the special symbol is finished.
After completing the above procedure, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 73).

[Production pattern management process]
FIG. 75 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of production symbol management processing. Effect symbol management processing includes execution selection processing (step S500), effect symbol change pre-process (step S502), effect symbol change process (step S504), effect symbol stop display process (step S506), and when the variable winning device is in operation. This configuration includes a group of subroutines for processing (step S508). The basic flow of the effect symbol management process will be described below along with each process.

Step S500: In the execution selection process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (one of steps S502 to S508). For example, the effect control CPU 126 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the effect symbol management process in the "jump table" as the return address. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the variable display effect has not yet started, the effect control CPU 126 selects the effect symbol change pre-processing (step S502) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the effect symbol change pre-processing has already been completed, the effect control CPU 126 selects the effect symbol change process (step S504) as the next jump destination, and if the effect symbol change process has been completed, the next As the jump destination of the production symbol stop display processing (step S506) is selected. Also, the variable winning device operation time processing (step S508) is selected as a jump destination only when the variable winning device management processing (step S5000 in FIG. 23) is selected in the main control CPU72. In this case, steps S502 to S506 are not executed.

Step S502: In the effect symbol variation preprocessing, the effect control CPU 126 performs the work of adjusting the conditions for starting the variable display effect using the effect symbol Hz and the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2. In addition, in this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the contents of the ready-to-win effect according to various conditions (lottery result, winning type (type of winning pattern), variation pattern, etc.) (pre-occurrence notice pattern, after-reach notice pattern, etc.). In addition, the effect control CPU 126 also controls a demonstration effect when the pachinko machine 1 is in a so-called customer waiting state. The specific contents of the processing will be described later using another flowchart.

Step S504: In the effect symbol changing process, the effect control CPU 126 generates control information to instruct the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) as necessary. For example, when an effect using the push button 45a or the lever member 45b is performed during execution of the variable display effect, the effect control CPU 126 monitors whether the player has operated the effect button, and the effect content ( button presentation) is instructed to the display control CPU 146 .

Step S506: In the effect symbol stop display processing, the effect control CPU 126 controls the contents of the stop display effect according to the result of the internal lottery. That is, the effect control CPU 126 instructs the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) to end the variable display effect and execute the stop display effect. In response to this, the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) actually terminates the variable display effect that has been executed so far in the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and executes the stop display effect. As a result, the stop display effect is executed substantially in synchronization with the stop display of the special symbols, and the result of the internal lottery can be instructed (disclosure, notification, notification, etc.) to the player (execution of the symbol effect). means).

Step S508: In the process when the variable winning device is activated, the effect control CPU 126 controls the effect contents during the small winning game or the big winning. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the contents of the effect during the big role according to various conditions (for example, winning type). The specific contents of the processing will be further described later with reference to another flowchart.

[Production pattern change pre-processing]
Next, FIG. 76 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the above effect symbol variation pre-processing. An example procedure will be described below.

Step S600: The production control CPU 126 confirms whether or not it has received a demonstration production command from the main control CPU 72 . Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not a command for demonstration effect is stored. As a result, when it is confirmed that the demonstration effect command is saved (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S602.

Step S602: The effect control CPU 126 executes demonstration selection processing. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects a demonstration effect pattern. The demonstration effect pattern defines the contents of the effect indicating that the pachinko machine 1 is in a so-called customer waiting state.
It should be noted that, as an effect representing the customer waiting state, it is also possible to display content to prevent the player from becoming addicted to the game, such as ``Let's be careful not to become addicted to the game''. By doing so, it is possible to easily execute an effect related to addiction prevention at an appropriate timing, and to reduce the disadvantage of the player.

After completing the above procedure, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the address at the end of the effect symbol management process. Then, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control processing as it is, and controls the contents of the demonstration effect based on the demonstration effect pattern in the following display output process (step S404 in FIG. 73) and lamp driving process (step S406 in FIG. 73). do.

On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the demonstration effect command is not saved in step S600 (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S604.

Step S604: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the change this time is a loss (non-winning). Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is stored. As a result, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is stored (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S612. Conversely, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is not stored (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S606. It should be noted that it is also possible to confirm whether or not this time's variation is lost based on a variation pattern command or a stop symbol command in addition to the lottery result command. That is, if the current variation pattern command corresponds to the lost normal variation or the lost reach variation, it can be determined that the current variation is a loss. Alternatively, if the current stop symbol command designates a non-winning symbol, it can be determined that the current variation is a loss.

Step S606: If the lottery result command is other than non-winning (lost) (step S604: No), then the effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not this time's change is a big hit. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the lottery result command at the time of the big hit is stored. As a result, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of the big hit is stored (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S610. Conversely, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command for the big win is not stored (No), since only the lottery result command for the small win remains, the performance control CPU 126 executes step S608 in this case. It should be noted that it is also possible to confirm whether or not the current variation is a big hit based on the variation pattern command or the stop symbol command. That is, if the current variation pattern command corresponds to the big hit variation, it can be determined that the current variation is the big hit. Also, if the current stop symbol command corresponds to a big win symbol, it can be determined that the current variation is a big win.

Step S608: The production control CPU 126 executes small hit fluctuation production pattern selection processing. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72 . The production pattern number is prepared in advance corresponding to the variation pattern command, and the production control CPU 126 can refer to a production pattern selection table (not shown) to select the production pattern number corresponding to the variation pattern command at that time. can. Incidentally, the effect pattern number may be prepared in pairs with the variation pattern command, or a plurality of numbers may be prepared for one variation pattern command.

In addition, when the production pattern number is selected, the production control CPU 126 refers to the production table (not shown), and the production pattern Hz corresponding to the variable production pattern number at that time and the fluctuation schedule (variation time) of the fourth patterns Z1 and Z2, stop. Decide on the mode of display, etc.

For example, the production control CPU 126 changes the production design Hz, the 7-segment production design and the fourth design Z2 in the state of the "drive mode" when the second special design changes in the time shortening state, and finally the small winning design is changed. A process of selecting an effect pattern for stop-displaying the effect pattern Hz corresponding to the win, the 7-segment effect pattern and the fourth pattern Z2 is executed.

On the other hand, the effect control CPU 126, when the second special symbol in the non-time reduction state changes small hit, for example, in the state of continuing the "drive mode" or in the normal mode, the effect pattern Hz, the 7 segment effect pattern and the fourth The pattern Z2 is changed, and the process of finally selecting the effect pattern for stop-displaying the effect pattern Hz corresponding to the small hit, the 7-segment effect pattern and the fourth pattern Z2 is executed.

The above procedure is for the case of a "minor hit", but if it corresponds to a big hit, the effect control CPU 126 confirms that it is a "big hit" in step S606 (Yes). In this case, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S610.

Step S610: The effect control CPU 126 executes a variation effect pattern selection process at the time of a big hit. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72 . It should be noted that, in the process of selecting the performance pattern at the time of a big hit, the process may be further branched for each stop symbol at the time of a big win.

In addition, in the case of non-winning, the following procedure is executed. That is, when the effect control CPU 126 confirms that there is a deviation in step S604 (Yes), it then executes step S612.

Step S612: The effect control CPU 126 executes a variation effect pattern selection process when losing. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at the time of loss based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72 . The effect pattern number at the time of losing is classified into "normal loss fluctuation", "short time loss fluctuation", "loss reach fluctuation", etc. Further, a detailed reach fluctuation pattern is specified for "loss reach fluctuation". Which effect pattern number the effect control CPU 126 selects is determined based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control CPU 72 .

When the performance pattern number at the time of losing is selected, the performance control CPU 126 refers to a performance table (not shown), and determines the variation schedule (variation time, reach Determines presence/absence of occurrence, reach type and reach occurrence timing in the case of reach occurrence, and mode of stop display (for example, "7"-"2"-"4", etc.). It should be noted that the method of determining the effect at the time of losing is the same as at the time of the big hit.

When determining the variable performance pattern at the time of a small win, a big win, and a loss, a performance pattern of a pseudo-continuous advance notice performance (pseudo-continuous) can also be determined together.

In this process, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting an effect pattern related to the search challenge effect. For example, the production control CPU 126 selects the production pattern of the search challenge production when the second special symbol fluctuates in the non-time shortening state, and selects the production pattern of finding an animal when it corresponds to a small hit or a big hit. However, if it falls under the error, select a performance pattern in which the animal cannot be found. It should be noted that the search challenge effect should not be executed if the second special symbol variation becomes a short variation due to the number of special variations remaining (the number of special variations is a value greater than 0). can also

After executing any one of the above steps S608, S610, and S612, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S614 next.

Step S614: The effect control CPU 126 executes a notice selection process (preview effect executing means). In this processing, the effect control CPU 126 selects by lottery the details of the advance notice effect to be executed during the current variable display effect. The content of the notice effect is determined based on, for example, the result of the internal lottery (winning or not winning) and the current internal state (normal state, time reduction state). As described above, the notice effect is to notify the player of the possibility of the ready-to-win state occurring during the variable display effect, or to notify the player of the possibility of finally winning a big win or a small win. . Therefore, the selection ratio of the notice effect is set low when the game is not won, but the selection ratio of the notice effect is set higher than when the game is not won in order to increase the player's expectation when the game is won.

Step S616: The effect control CPU 126 executes mode effect management processing (advantageous game state effect executing means). In this process, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a background image according to the stay mode. For example, the effect control CPU 126, in principle, when the internal state is the non-time reduction state, executes the process of selecting the background image corresponding to the normal mode, and when the internal state is the time reduction state, The process of selecting the background image corresponding to the drive mode (the process of selecting the effect during time saving) is executed.

However, the effect control CPU 126, as an exception, even if the internal state is the non-time shortening state, when the second special symbol is stored when the time shortening state is changed to the non-time shortening state. , a background image corresponding to the drive mode is selected (advantageous game state effect execution means, advantageous game state effect continuation execution means). Incidentally, such an exceptional process is executed in the effect symbol stop display process to be described later.

After completing the above procedure, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol management process (end address). As a result, in the subsequent effect symbol fluctuation process (step S504 in FIG. 75), the variable display effect and the stop display effect are executed based on the actually selected variable effect pattern (symbol effect executing means), A notice effect is executed based on various notice effect patterns. In addition, various stay mode effects are executed based on the background (stay) mode pattern selected here.

[Production pattern stop display process]
FIG. 77 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the effect symbol stop display process. An example procedure will be described below.

Step S650: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the internal state is during time reduction (time reduction state). Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 can confirm the internal state by accessing the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirming the state designation command. The internal state can also be confirmed by a variation pattern command (the same applies hereinafter).

As a result, when it is confirmed that the internal state is in the time saving (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S652, and when it cannot be confirmed that the internal state is in the time saving (No), the effect control CPU 126 steps Execute S656.

Step S652: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not it is the time saving final variation. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms the number cutting counter command, thereby confirming whether or not it is the time saving final variation. For example, if it is a change when the first cut counter value or the second cut counter value switches from "1" to "0", the effect control CPU 126 can determine that it is the time saving final fluctuation.

As a result, when it is confirmed that it is the time saving final variation (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S654, and when it is not possible to confirm that it is the time saving final change (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S666. .

Step S654: The production control CPU 126 executes a process of setting the number of second special symbols to be stored in the pseudo time saving counter. The pseudo time-saving counter is stored in the RAM 130. For example, when the number of stored second special symbols is "0", the pseudo time-saving counter is set to "0", and the number of stored second special symbols is "1". ", "1" is set to the pseudo time saving counter, and "4" is set to the pseudo time saving counter when the number of stored second special symbols is "4".
After completing this process, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S666.

Step S656: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the staying background is the normal background, that is, whether or not the background image displayed on the liquid crystal display 42 is the background image corresponding to the normal mode.

As a result, if it is confirmed that the stay background is the normal background (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S666, and if it cannot be confirmed that the stay background is the normal background (No), the effect control CPU 126 steps Execute S658.

Step S658: The production control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the value of the simulated time saving counter is greater than zero.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the value of the pseudo time-saving counter is a value greater than 0 (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S660 and confirms that the value of the pseudo time-saving counter is a value greater than 0. If it cannot be confirmed (No), that is, if the value of the pseudo time saving counter is 0, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S664.

Step S660: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of setting the stay background to the simulated time saving background. The pseudo time-saving background is the background of the drive mode in which the right-handed display is not displayed.

By executing such a process, the effect control CPU126, even when the time shortening state (advantageous gaming state) ends and transitions to a non-time shortening state (predetermined gaming state), the pseudo time saving counter When the value is greater than 0 (when a special condition is satisfied), it is possible to continuously execute the production during time reduction (advantageous game state production) (advantageous game state production continuous execution means). .

Step S662: The production control CPU 126 executes a process of subtracting 1 from the simulated time saving counter.

Step S664: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of setting the stay background to the normal background. The normal background is the normal mode background.

Step S666: The effect control CPU 126 executes other processes. In the other processing, as described above, the effect control CPU 126 controls the content of the stop display effect in a mode according to the result of the internal lottery.

Then, after finishing the above process, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol management process (FIG. 75).

[Processing when variable winning device is activated]
FIG. 78 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of processing when the variable winning device is activated. An example procedure will be described below.

Step S800: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the result of this variation was a big hit. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130, confirms the lottery result command, and confirms whether it corresponds to the big win or the small win. As a result of this confirmation, if the result of this variation is a big hit (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S802. On the other hand, if the result of this variation is not a big hit (No), that is, if it is a small hit, the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S804.

Step S802: The effect control CPU 126 executes the processing when the variable winning device is activated at the time of the big hit. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect pattern to be executed from the start of the big win game to the end of the big win game.

Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 stores various image data related to the effect pattern at the time of the big hit, which is stored in advance in the image ROM 154 of the effect display control device 144 (VDP 152), as the effect during the big win to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 42. A reading process is executed according to the winning pattern.

Step S804: The effect control CPU 126 executes a small hit time variable winning device activation process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect pattern to be executed from the start of the small win to the end of the small win.

Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect pattern (for example, an effect in which a car in which a female character is riding speeds up) indicating that a small win game has started at the start of a small win game, and suggests hitting to the right. If the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small winning game, the effect pattern when passing the specific area (a female character riding a car displays a heart mark with a letter V Execute the process of selecting the production listed).

After completing the above procedure, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol management process (FIG. 75).

[During time saving and pseudo time saving and other production processing]
FIG. 79 is a flow chart showing an example of a procedure of production processing during time saving and pseudo time saving. An example procedure will be described below.

Here, during time saving (time saving) is a time saving state, and pseudo time saving (pseudo time saving) is a state in which a background image during time saving is displayed in a non-time saving state (in a non-time saving state drive mode).

Step S850: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the internal state is during time reduction (time reduction state). Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 can confirm the internal state by accessing the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirming the state designation command.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the internal state is in the time saving (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes steps S852 and S854, and when it cannot be confirmed that the internal state is in the time saving (No), effect control CPU 126 executes step S856.

Step S852: The effect control CPU 126 executes remaining number display processing based on the number of remaining time reductions. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130, confirms the number-of-times counter command, and selects an effect pattern in which the value obtained by adding "4" to the second number-of-times counter value is displayed as the remaining number of times. Execute the processing to be performed. As a result, during the time saving mode, a value of “10 times remaining to 5 times remaining” or “100 times remaining to 5 times remaining” is displayed as the remaining times of the remaining times display effect.

Step S854: The effect control CPU 126 executes a right-hand hitting suggestion effect selection process. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting an effect pattern for displaying an image corresponding to the right-handed suggestive effect on the upper part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 .

Step S855: The effect control CPU 126 executes right-handed emphasis effect selection processing. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126, when it is necessary to execute a right-handed emphasis effect, for example, when the player continues to hit left-handed despite the transition to the time shortening state, the liquid crystal display Processing for selecting an effect pattern for displaying an image corresponding to an effect emphasizing right-handed hitting on the upper part of the screen of the device 42 is executed.

Step S856: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the internal state is during pseudo time saving. Effect control CPU126, when the value of the pseudo time saving counter is a value larger than 0, it can be determined that it is during the pseudo time saving.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the internal state is in the pseudo time saving (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S858, and when it cannot be confirmed that the internal state is in the pseudo time saving (No), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 73).

Step S858: The effect control CPU 126 executes remaining number display processing based on the pseudo time saving counter. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting an effect pattern in which the value of the pseudo time saving counter is displayed as the remaining number of times. As a result, during the simulated time saving, a value of "4 remaining to 1 remaining (last)" is displayed as the remaining number of times of the remaining number display effect.

After finishing the above process, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 73).

[Second Special Symbol Winning Process]
FIG. 80 is a flow chart showing a procedure example of the second special symbol winning process. An example procedure will be described below.

Step S880: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the normal symbol winning is normal. A normal normal symbol election is when the normal symbol lottery corresponds to "hit symbol 2". As a result, the case of "hit design 1" in the normal design lottery is excluded.

The reason for excluding the case corresponding to "hit pattern 1" is that when it corresponds to "hit pattern 1", the variable start winning device 28 is not long open but short open, so at that time the second special This is because such a game method is not a normal game method, although there is a possibility that the memory of the symbols can be accumulated. For this reason, when the game method is not normal, various icons are not displayed.

As a result, when it is confirmed that it is a normal normal symbol winning (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S881. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that normal normal symbol winning has been performed (No), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 73).

Step S881: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the game state is the non-time reduction state. The game state can be confirmed by a state specifying command or the like.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the game state is the non-time reduction state (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S882. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the game state is the non-time shortening state (No), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 73).

Step S882: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the game state is other than the jackpot (for example, during variation, during stop display, during customer waiting state, etc.). Whether or not a big hit is in progress can be confirmed by various commands (number of rounds command, firing position designation command, etc.).

As a result, when it is confirmed that the game state is other than during the jackpot (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S883. On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that the game state is other than the jackpot (No), that is, if the game state is the jackpot, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 73).

Step S883: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the number of special variations of the second special symbol is "0". The special variation frequency of the second special symbol can be confirmed by a special variation frequency designation command.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the number of special variations of the second special symbol is "0" (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S884. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the number of special variations of the second special symbol is "0" (No), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 73).

By executing such processing, the effect control CPU 126, when the condition (predetermined condition) not to execute the search challenge icon display effect is satisfied, the second special symbol in the non-time reduction state (predetermined game state) Even if a lottery opportunity (second lottery opportunity) occurs, search challenge icon display performance (specific performance) is not executed (control means).
That is, the search challenge icon display effect (specific effect) is a lottery of the second special symbol in the non-time reduction state (predetermined game state) when the condition (predetermined condition) for not executing the search challenge icon display effect is satisfied. Even if an opportunity (second lottery opportunity) occurs, it is not executed.

The predetermined condition is that a special variation pattern (short variation, short variation) different from the predetermined variation pattern (long variation, long variation) is selected as the variation pattern of the second special symbol (second symbol). be.

Step S884: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not there is a win in the memory of the first special symbol. Confirmation of storage of the first special symbol can be confirmed by a variation pattern destination determination command. The object to be confirmed may include not only the memory of the first special symbol but also the first special symbol during fluctuation.

As a result, when it is confirmed that there is no win in the memory of the first special symbol (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S885. On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that there is no win in the memory of the first special symbol (No), that is, if there is a win in the memory of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S886.

Step S885: The effect control CPU 126 executes search challenge icon display effect pattern selection processing. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting an effect pattern for displaying the search challenge icon IC on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42 .

By executing such a process, the effect control CPU 126, in the non-time reduction state (predetermined game state), search challenge icon display effect (specific effect ) can be executed (specific effect executing means).

Step S886: The effect control CPU 126 executes special icon display effect pattern selection processing. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes processing for selecting an effect pattern for displaying the special icon IC<b>2 on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42 .

After finishing the above process, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 73).

As described above, according to this embodiment, there are the following effects.
(1) According to the present embodiment, in the non-shortening state (predetermined gaming state), the search challenge icon display effect (specific effect) is basically executed based on the lottery opportunity of the second special symbol. Since the search challenge icon display effect is not executed depending on the situation, it is possible to prevent the search challenge icon display effect from being executed in a scene where the execution of the search challenge icon display effect causes discomfort, thereby reducing the discomfort in the effect. be able to.

(2) According to the present embodiment, the condition (predetermined condition) for not executing the search challenge icon display effect is that a special variation pattern different from the predetermined variation pattern is selected as the variation pattern of the second special symbol. Since it is a condition, by setting a special variation pattern, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a situation in which the originally intended performance cannot be executed, and as a result, the discomfort in the performance is reduced. be able to.

(3) According to the present embodiment, when the value of the number of special fluctuations is greater than 0 (when the predetermined condition is satisfied), the variable time during which the search challenge icon display effect (specific effect) cannot be executed. (Variation pattern with a short variation of about several seconds) can be selected, so that the execution of the search challenge icon display effect in an unintended situation is also avoided by selecting the variation pattern. can be done.

(4) In the present embodiment, in the non-time shortening state (normal time, left-handed state), one problem is to solve the inconsistency when executing the chance production for the variation of the second special symbol. ing.
Preconditions of the present embodiment are, for example, as follows.
The gaming machine of the present embodiment is a one-type two-type mixing machine, and in the non-shortening state, a game ball can enter the starting device left start winning opening 454 . The starting device left starting winning port 454 is a winning port for opening the variable starting winning device 28 arranged in the right hitting area. When the game ball wins the variable start winning device 28, a search challenge icon display effect (specific effect) is executed, and a variable effect (search challenge effect) for a predetermined time is executed. Then, in displaying the search challenge icon, in a situation where inconsistency occurs, restrictions are imposed so that the search challenge icon is not displayed.

(Case 1)
In the state where the number of special variations of the second special symbol remains (when the memory is not accumulated to the maximum in the final variation of the time shortening state), the shortened variation (short variation) is selected in the variation of the second special symbol. (eg, 1 second variation).
In the state where the number of special variations of the second special symbol does not remain (when the memory is stored to the maximum in the final variation of the time shortening state), long variation (long variation, search challenge variation) in the variation of the second special symbol is selected (eg, 10 second variation).

In such a specification, when the winning pattern 2 is found in the normal pattern lottery in the non-shortening state, the liquid crystal screen suggests hitting to the right and prompts the variable starting winning device 28 to enter the game ball. Above, when the number of special variations of the second special symbol remains, the search challenge icon is prevented from appearing.

(Case 2)
When the normal symbol lottery in the non-time shortening state corresponds to the winning symbol 2 and the game ball enters the variable starting winning device 28, basically, the search challenge icon appears. Here, if there is a memory of a big win in the memory of the first special symbol, when the control of winning order digestion is adopted, the big win game of the first special symbol is executed first, and the game state is a time shortening state. , the quest challenge itself may not run. Also, if the search challenge icon appears in this situation, there is a possibility that the search challenge icon will remain even after the big win game. For this reason, when the game ball enters the variable starting prize winning device 28, the memory contents (holding information) of the first special symbol are checked, and if the big hit variation is included, the search challenge icon IC is replaced with to appear a special icon IC2.

By executing such control, it is possible to reduce the discomfort in appearance.

The present invention can be modified in various ways without being limited to the above-described embodiment. The mode of presentation given in one embodiment is an example, and is not limited to the mode of presentation described above.

In the above-described embodiment, an example in which the present invention is applied to a so-called 1-type and 2-type mixed machine has been described, but the present invention may be applied to a so-called 1-type gaming machine (a gaming machine that does not have a specific area).
In addition, the present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine with a probability variation function. It can also be applied to a game machine of ST type (a type that sets a substantial upper limit to the number of probability variations).
Furthermore, the present invention can be applied to a gaming machine having a variable probability region, and can also be applied to a gaming machine having no variable probability region.
Furthermore, the present invention can be applied to a gaming machine that does not adopt "simultaneous spinning of the first special symbol and the second special symbol", and can also be applied to a gaming machine that employs simultaneous spinning. .

In the above-described embodiment, an example of a gaming machine equipped with the 7-segment display device 200 has been described, but a gaming machine without the 7-segment display device 200 may be used.
Also, the 7-segment display device 200 may be changed to a drum unit (for example, a device having three rows of reels) or a liquid crystal display.

The present invention can also be applied to pachinko machines with settings.
The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine equipped with a performance display monitor.

When there is a reserve of the remaining second special symbol (remaining reserve after time reduction exit) when shifting from the time reduction state to the non-time reduction state (when the predetermined condition is not satisfied), a specific performance is executed, When there is a hold of the second special symbol generated in the non-time shortening state (when a predetermined condition is satisfied), it is possible not to execute the specific effect. "Specific effect is not executed" means that in the non-time shortening state (predetermined game state), the second special symbol lottery lottery opportunity (second lottery opportunity) occurs, but the second special symbol lottery It is assumed that a lottery opportunity has not occurred, accumulation of holding of the second special symbol and variation of the second special symbol are not executed, and as a result, the specific performance is not executed.

The images given in other production examples are merely examples, and can be appropriately modified. Also, the structure, board configuration, specific numerical values, etc. of the pachinko machine 1, including those shown in the drawings, are preferred examples, and it goes without saying that these can be modified as appropriate.

FIG. 81 is a front view of a pachinko machine of another embodiment. Also, FIG. 82 is a rear view of a pachinko machine of another embodiment. In addition, in the following description, basically, the same description as in the above-described embodiment is omitted, but some parts are redundantly described. Further, with respect to the reference numerals in the drawings, some portions are assigned the same reference numerals as those of the above-described embodiment, and other portions are provided with different reference numerals. A major difference between the above-described embodiment and other embodiments is that a decoration unit is attached to the upper front portion of the pachinko machine of other embodiments. A pachinko machine according to another embodiment will be described below.

The pachinko machine 1 uses game balls as game media. In the game in the pachinko machine 1, each game ball is a medium having a game value, and the privilege (profit) that the player enjoys as a result of the game is, for example, the game ball acquired by the player. can be converted into a game value based on the number of The overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 will be described below.

Here, in this specification, the left side as viewed from the player seated facing the pachinko machine 1 is defined as left, the right side as viewed from the player is defined as right, and the upper side as viewed from the player is defined as up. The lower side viewed from the player is referred to as the bottom, the near side viewed from the player is referred to as the front, and the far side viewed from the player is referred to as the rear.

〔overall structure〕
The pachinko machine 1 mainly includes an outer frame unit 2, an integrated door unit 4 and an inner frame assembly 7 (plastic frame, game machine frame) as its main body. An integrated door unit 4 is located on the frontmost side when viewed from the front facing the player. The inner frame assembly 7 is positioned on the rear side (deep side) of the integrated door unit 4 , and the outer frame unit 2 is arranged so as to surround the outer side of the inner frame assembly 7 .

The outer frame unit 2 is a structure in which wood and metal materials are combined in a vertically long rectangular shape. It is fixed using In the vertically long rectangular outer frame unit 2, wood is used for the parts corresponding to the upper and lower short sides, and metal material is used for the parts corresponding to the left and right long sides.

The integrated door unit 4 has a structure in which the tray unit 6 is integrated at its lower position. The integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 are attached to the island facility via the outer frame unit 2, and each of these operates in an opening/closing manner via a hinge mechanism (not shown). The opening/closing axis of the hinge mechanism (not shown) extends vertically along the left end of the pachinko machine 1 when viewed from the front.

A unified lock unit 9 is provided inside the right edge of the inner frame assembly 7 when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1. - 特許庁Correspondingly, locking devices (not shown) are also provided on the right side edges (rear sides) of the integrated door unit 4 and the outer frame unit 2, respectively. When the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 are closed with respect to the outer frame unit 2, the unified lock unit 9 on the back side disables the opening of the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 together with the lock. .

A cylinder lock 6a with a keyhole is provided on the right edge of the tray unit 6. As shown in FIG. For example, when the manager of the game arcade inserts the special key into the keyhole and twists the cylinder lock 6a clockwise, the unified lock unit 9 is actuated and the integrated door unit 4 can be opened together with the inner frame assembly 7. . When all of these are opened from the outer frame unit 2 to the front side (moved like a door), the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is exposed on the front side.

On the other hand, when the cylinder lock 6a is twisted counterclockwise, only the integrated door unit 4 is unlocked while the inner frame assembly 7 remains locked, so that the integrated door unit 4 can be opened. When the integral door unit 4 is opened to the front side, the game board unit 8 is directly exposed, and in this state, the manager of the game parlor can remove obstacles such as clogged balls in the board surface. Further, when the integrated door unit 4 is opened, the tray unit 6 is also opened to the front side together.

The pachinko machine 1 also includes a game board unit 8 as a game unit. The game board unit 8 is supported by the inner frame assembly 7 behind (inside) the integrated door unit 4 . The game board unit 8 can be attached to and detached from the inner frame assembly 7 with the integrated door unit 4 opened to the front side, for example. The integrated door unit 4 has a vertically long circular window 4a formed in the center thereof, and a glass unit (no reference numeral) is mounted in the window 4a. The glass unit is, for example, a combination of two transparent plates (glass plates) cut to match the shape of the window 4a. The glass unit is attached to the rear side of the integrated door unit 4 via a fixture (not shown). A game area 8a (game area where game balls flow down, board surface) is formed on the front surface of the game board unit 8, and the game area 8a can be visually recognized by the player from the front side through the window 4a. When the integral door unit 4 is closed, a space is formed between the inner surface of the glass unit and the board surface to allow the game balls to flow down.

[Structure of ball plate]
The receiving tray unit 6 has a shape projecting from the integrated door unit 4 to the front side as a whole, and an upper tray 6b is formed on the upper surface thereof. In the upper tray 6b, game balls lent to the player (rental balls) and game balls obtained by winning prizes (prize balls) can be stored. Further, the tray unit 6 is formed with a lower tray 6c below the upper tray 6b. In the lower tray 6c, the game balls put out while the upper tray 6b is full are stored. The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is a model connected to a card unit, and the game balls borrowed by the player are received from the payout device unit 172 on the back side separately from the prize balls. 6c) is paid out.

A lending operation unit 14 is provided on the upper surface of the tray unit 6, and a ball lending button 10 and a return button 12 are arranged in the lending operation unit 14. - 特許庁When the player operates the ball lending button 10 with a valuable medium (for example, a magnetic recording medium, a storage IC built-in medium, etc.) inserted into a card unit (not shown), the number corresponding to a predetermined number of points (for example, 5 points) (For example, 125) game balls are rented. For this reason, a frequency display section (not shown) is arranged on the upper surface of the lending operation section 14, and the remaining frequency of the valuable medium inserted in the card unit is displayed on this frequency display section. By operating the return button 12, the player can receive the return of the valuable medium with remaining points. Although the example of the model connected to the card unit is described in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 may be a cash machine (a model not connected to the card unit).

Further, on the upper surface of the receiving tray unit 6, an upper tray ball removing button 6d is installed in front of the upper tray 6b, and a lower tray ball removing lever 6e is provided in the center before the lower tray 6c. is installed. The player can cause the game balls stored in the upper tray 6b to flow down to the lower tray 6c by, for example, pressing the upper tray ball removal button 6d. In addition, the player can drop and discharge the game balls stored in the lower tray 6c by pushing the lower tray ball extraction lever 6e backward. The ejected game balls are received, for example, in a ball receiving box (not shown).

A handle unit 16 is installed at the lower right portion of the tray unit 6 . A player can operate the shooting control board set 174 by operating the handle unit 16 to shoot (hit) a game ball toward the game area 8a (ball shooting device). The shot game ball rises from the lower edge of the game board unit 8 along the left edge, is guided by an outer band (not shown), and is thrown into the game area 8a. A large number of obstacle nails, windmills (no reference numerals in the figure), etc. are arranged in the game area 8a, and the thrown game ball flows down the game area 8a while being guided and guided by the obstacle nails and the windmills. The configuration inside the game area 8a will be further described later with reference to another drawing.

[Composition of the front of the frame]
The integrated door unit 4 is provided with a left top lens unit 47 and an upper right illumination unit 49 as components for presentation. Among them, the left top lens unit 47 incorporates a glass frame top lamp 46 and a left glass frame decoration lamp 48 , and the upper right illumination unit 49 incorporates a right glass frame decoration lamp 50 . In addition, left and right glass frame decoration lamps 52 are installed in the integral door unit 4 so as to be continuous below the left top lens unit 47 and the upper right illumination unit 49. These glass frame decoration lamps 52 are It extends from the left and right edges of the integrated door unit 4 to the upper side of the tray unit 6 so as to wrap around. In the integrated door unit 4, the glass frame top lamp 46, the left and right glass frame decorative lamps 48, 50, 52, etc. are arranged so as to surround the glass unit.

The various lamps 46, 48, 50, 52 described above perform effects by, for example, light emission from built-in LEDs (lighting, blinking, change in luminance gradation, change in color tone, etc.). In the upper part of the integrated door unit 4, the left top lens unit 47 and the upper right illumination unit 49 each incorporate an upper glass frame speaker 54, and the left and right glass frame decorative lamps 52 each incorporate an in-glass frame speaker 55. is built in. On the other hand, an inner frame speaker 56 is incorporated in the lower right position of the inner frame assembly 7 (the upper left position of the handle unit 16 as viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1), and an outer frame speaker 56 is installed in the lower left position of the outer frame unit 2. 58 is incorporated. These speakers 54, 55, 56, and 58 output sound effects, BGM, voices, etc. (general sound) to execute production.

[Operation member]
An operation unit 60 (operating means) is installed in the center of the tray unit 6 so as to protrude from the upper tray 6b toward the upper front side. The operation unit 60 has a large push button 64 in its center and a handle lever 62 on the left side of the push button 64 . The operation unit 60 is capable of receiving operations in various scenes shown on the production. The player pulls the handle lever 62 toward the front side in one scene of the performance, and pushes the push button 64 in another scene. By operating the operation unit 60 in various modes, the player can switch the contents of the effect (for example, the background screen displayed on the liquid crystal display 42), for example, while the symbols are changing, the big win is being confirmed, or the big win is being displayed. During the game, it is possible to generate some kind of effects (announcement effects, variable probability promotion effects, promotion effects during big roles, etc.).

A ring-shaped portion 65 is installed around the push button 64 so as to surround the push button 64 . Unlike the handle lever 62 and the push button 64, the ring-shaped part 65 is a member provided for decoration, and rotates counterclockwise in conjunction with the pull-in operation of the handle lever 62. As shown in FIG. In addition, the ring-shaped portion 65 has a plurality of cells that are separated at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. These cells cannot be operated by the player, but they are effectively used to inform the player of the operation method.

When the player is requested to perform some kind of operation, a reduced image representing the operation method of the operation unit 60 is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 . At this time, each cell of the ring-shaped portion 65 in the reduced image is expressed as if it were a lamp, in order to inform the player of the time during which the specified operation can be performed (effective operation time). be. More specifically, the ring-shaped portion 65 in the reduced image is represented as if all the cells are lit when it becomes operable, and the cells are turned off one by one as the remaining time decreases. When the remaining time runs out, all the cells are turned off. The actual ring-shaped portion 65 does not have a light source and does not turn on/off like the ring-shaped portion 65 shown in the reduced image displayed on the screen. By switching the lighting/lighting out of the portion 65 in this manner, the player can intuitively grasp the remaining time of the operation.

Further, the push button 64 is structured so as to protrude greatly upward when a predetermined trigger occurs during the progress of the game. When the push button 64 protrudes, it protrudes to a height approximately three times higher than normal. Push button 64 has a light source therein. The push button 64 normally emits light in one color (for example, blue) or in multiple colors, but when it is protruding, it can emit more colorful light to exhibit a strong presence. Such an operation of the push button 64 makes it possible for the player to recognize that the pressing operation of the button required in this scene is particularly important.

Although the handle lever 62 and the push button 64 are mounted on the same operation unit 60 in this embodiment, the handle lever 62 and the push button 64 may be provided as independent operation members. Moreover, these operating members may be arranged at close positions or may be arranged at distant positions.

In addition, a directional key 66 is provided on the upper surface of the tray unit 6 adjacent to the lending operation section 14 . The direction key 66 is composed of four key switches indicating the up, down, left, and right directions arranged in a cross shape, and the key switches for each direction can be independently pressed. The player can arbitrarily move the cursor or the like displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display by pressing the direction key 66 in various scenes of the effect.

[Decoration unit]
A decoration unit 800 is attached to the front upper portion of the pachinko machine 1. - 特許庁The decoration unit 800 can be attached to and detached from the pachinko machine 1 by a predetermined attachment member (mechanical mechanism such as screws and hooks). Note that the decoration unit 800 may be one that cannot be removed from the pachinko machine 1 .
The decoration unit 800 (decoration) is a box-shaped member, and is composed of a transparent or translucent member that transmits light. The decoration unit 800 is a cubic member on which predetermined character information is displayed. luminous.

[Composition of the back side]
As shown in FIG. 82, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, there are a power control unit 162, a main control board unit 170, a payout device unit 172, a flow path unit 173, a launch control board set 174, a payout control board unit 176, and a back cover. A unit 178 and the like are installed. In addition, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, various electronic devices (including a control computer not shown) that constitute the power system and control system of the pachinko machine 1, an external terminal board 160, a power cord (power plug) 164, A ground wire (ground terminal) 166, connection wiring (not shown), and the like are installed.

The main control board unit 170 incorporates a main control device, and the performance display monitor 200 is connected to the main control device. The performance display monitor 200 is arranged in the main controller in a visible manner in the upper left area of the main control board unit 170 when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the back side, and has four 7-segment LEDs. Four 7-segment LEDs are arranged side by side in the left-right direction, and each 7-segment LED consists of 7 segments that can display decimal Arabic numerals and a dot segment located in the lower right of the 7 segments. It is Performance display monitor 200 is visible through a transparent case covering main control board unit 170 .

The main controller is also provided with a RAM clear switch 304 and a keyhole 306 for setting keys. The RAM clear switch 304 is a switch used for clearing the RAM, that is, for initializing the RAM (RWM) provided in the main control device, and in this embodiment, it is also used as a switch for changing settings. be done. The setting key keyhole 306 is a keyhole for inserting a setting key required to change or refer to the game setting of the pachinko machine 1 .

The RAM clear switch 304 is depressible through a through hole formed in a transparent case covering the main control board unit 170 . Note that the RAM clear switch 304 may be arranged outside the transparent case. The setting key keyhole 306 is provided in a state in which the key cylinder passes through the transparent case (a state in which the transparent case surrounds the key cylinder). Therefore, the setting key can be inserted and rotated while the transparent case remains sealed.

The positions of the performance display monitor 200, the RAM clear switch 304, and the keyhole 306 for setting keys are merely examples, and can be arranged at arbitrary positions. Further, the performance display monitor 200, the RAM clear switch 304, and the setting key keyhole 306 may be arranged outside the main controller and connected to the main controller.

The dispensing device unit 172 has, for example, a prize ball tank 172a and a prize ball case (no reference numerals). , can store game balls replenished from a replenishment path (not shown). The game balls stored in the prize ball tank 172a are led to the prize ball case through an upper prize ball gutter (not shown). The flow path unit 173 guides the game balls delivered from the payout device unit 172 toward the tray unit 6 on the front side.

The external terminal board 160 is for connecting the pachinko machine 1 to an external electronic device (for example, a data display device, hall computer, etc.). and various external information signals representing maintenance status etc. .

The power cord 164 secures the power supply (electric power) necessary for the pachinko machine 1 to operate, for example, by being connected to a power supply (for example, AC 24V) installed in an island facility of the game arcade. The ground wire 166 is also connected to a ground terminal installed in the island equipment to secure the grounding of the pachinko machine 1 .

FIG. 83 is a front view showing a single game board unit 8 of another embodiment. The game board unit 8 has a game board 8b serving as a base, and a game area 8a is formed on the front side of the game board 8b. The game board 8b is made of, for example, a transparent resin board, and when the game board unit 8 is fixed to the inner frame assembly 7, the front surface of the game board 8b is parallel to the glass unit. On the front surface of the game board 8b, a game area 8a is formed inside a substantially circular launch rail (no reference numeral). The launch rail extends clockwise from the lower left corner position of the game board 8b to the upper right corner position of the game board 8b.

In the game area 8a, a relatively large production unit 40 is arranged at its central position, and the game area 8a is largely divided into a left part, a right part and a lower part centering on the production unit 40. - 特許庁The left part of the game area 8a is the first game area (left-handed area L) used in the normal game state (low probability non-time reduction state), and the right part of the game area 8a is the special game state (jackpot game state, small winning game state, low probability time shortening state, high probability time shortening state, etc.) is the second game area (right hitting area R, specific area) used in. The left portion of the game area 8a is also used in the high-probability non-time reduction state (advantageous game state). In addition, in the game area 8a, around the production unit 40, there are a middle starting winning opening 26, a starting gate 20, normal winning openings 22, 24, a variable starting winning device 28, a first variable winning device 30, and a second variable winning device. 31 etc. are distributed and installed.

Among them, the middle start winning opening 26 is arranged in the center of the lower part of the game area 8a. The starting gate 20, the variable starting winning device 28, the second variable winning device 31 and the first variable winning device 30 are arranged in this order from the top on the right side of the game area 8a. Here, the first variable winning device 30 is arranged on the right side of the middle starting winning port 26 , and the second variable winning device 31 is arranged on the upper right of the first variable winning device 30 . Furthermore, the three normal winning openings 22 on the left side are arranged in the left part of the game area 8a, and the single normal winning opening 24 (predetermined winning opening) on the right side is arranged at the lower left of the first variable winning device 30. there is

A game ball thrown into the game area 8a enters a middle starting prize winning port 26 and normal winning prize ports 22 and 24 in the process of flowing down, passes through a starting gate 20, and is a variable starting prize winning device at the time of operation. 28, the first variable winning device 30 during the opening operation, and the second variable winning device 31 during the opening operation. Here, the game ball flowing down the left side area of the game area 8a may enter mainly the middle start winning opening 26 or the normal winning opening 22.例文帳に追加On the other hand, the game ball flowing down the right side area of the game area 8a mainly passes through the starting gate 20, enters the variable starting winning device 28 during operation, or enters the first variable winning device 30 during opening operation. There is a possibility that the ball will enter, the ball will enter the second variable prize winning device 31 during the opening operation, or the ball will enter the normal prize winning opening 24. - 特許庁The game ball that has passed through the starting gate 20 continues to flow down in the game area 8a, but there are a middle starting winning opening 26, normal winning openings 22, 24, a variable starting winning apparatus 28, a first variable winning apparatus 30, and a second variable winning opening. A game ball entered into the device 31 is recovered to the back side of the game board unit 8 through a through hole formed in a game board (a plywood material, a transparent board, etc. that constitute the game board unit 8).

Here, in the present embodiment, due to the configuration of the game area 8a (board surface), when a game ball is entered into the middle start winning opening 26 or the normal winning opening 22, the left side area (left-handed hitting) in the game area 8a It is necessary to hit a game ball (perform a so-called "left hit") in the area).

On the other hand, when the game ball is entered into the variable start-up winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, the second variable winning device 31, or the normal winning opening 24, the area of the right side of the game area 8a (right-handed area ) (executing the so-called “right-handed hitting”).

In this embodiment, the variable start winning device 28 operates when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied (when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed for a predetermined stop display time in a winning manner), and accordingly, the right start It is possible to enter the ball into the winning hole 28a (predetermined ball entry hole) (ordinary electric accessories). The variable start-up winning device 28 is provided with a tongue-type opening/closing member 28b. In the illustrated state, the opening/closing member 28b is in a position (retreat position) recessed from the board surface, making it impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the right start winning hole 28a. On the other hand, when the opening/closing member 28b moves to the position (driving position) where the opening/closing member 28b protrudes forward from the board surface, the opening/closing member 28b receives the game ball flowing down from above and guides the game ball to the right start winning opening 28a (right It becomes possible or easier for the ball to enter the start winning opening 28a). The variable start-up winning device 28 may be a device that opens the right start-up prize opening by displacing the opening/closing member so as to fall forward with its lower edge portion as a hinge.

The first variable winning device 30, when a prescribed condition is satisfied (when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of a big win or a small win), a predetermined first condition (for example, from the first round of the big win game) 5th round or 7th round to 10th round condition, condition that the small winning game is open) is satisfied, and it is possible to enter the first big winning hole 30b. (special electric accessory, first special entry event generating means).

The first variable prize winning device 30 is a device (upper attacker) arranged below the variable starting prize winning device 28, and has, for example, one opening/closing member 30a. The opening/closing member 30a is displaced from the closed position to the open position by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown). As shown in the drawing, the opening/closing member 30a is in the closed position (closed state) with the tip facing upward, and at this time, the first big prize winning port 30b cannot be won (the first big prize winning port 30b is closed). be. When the first variable prize winning device 30 operates, the opening/closing member 30a is displaced so as to fall to the right side with its lower edge portion as a hinge, thereby opening the first big prize winning port 30b (open state). During this time, the first variable winning device 30 is in a state in which the inflow of game balls is not disabled, and an event of winning into the first big winning hole 30b can be generated. At this time, the opening/closing member 30a also functions as a member that guides the inflow of game balls into the first big winning hole 30b. A game ball that has won the first big winning hole 30b passes through the first count switch 84 and is recovered to the back side of the game board unit 8 through a recovery passage (no reference numeral) after the winning is detected.

The second variable winning device 31, when a prescribed condition is satisfied (when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode), is a predetermined second condition (for example, the sixth round of the jackpot game). condition) is satisfied, and allows the ball to enter the second big winning hole 31b (specific winning hole) (special electric accessory, second special winning ball event generating means).

The second variable winning device 31 is a device (lower attacker) arranged below the first variable winning device 30, and has, for example, one opening/closing member 31a. The second variable winning device 31 is of a type in which the opening/closing member 31a slides inside the board surface (sliding attacker). The opening/closing member 31a reciprocates in the front-rear direction with respect to the board surface, for example, by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown). The opening/closing member 31a is in the closed position (closed state) in a state of protruding from the board surface toward the player side. is impossible or difficult (the second big winning hole 31b is closed). Then, when the second variable prize winning device 31 operates, the opening/closing member 31a is pulled into the inside of the board to open the second big prize winning port 31b (open state). During this time, the second variable winning device 31 is in a state where the inflow of game balls is not impossible (possible or easy), and can generate the event of the ball entering the second big winning hole 31b.

Further, inside the second variable winning device 31, a guiding passage 31c for guiding a game ball entering the second variable winning device 31 is arranged. The guiding path 31c extends leftward and downward from the second big prize winning opening 31b and branches into two at the tip.

A second count switch 85 is arranged upstream of the guide passage 31c, and a variable probability region blade member 31d and a variable probability region hole 31e are arranged on the lower right side of the guide passage 31c. A discharge port 31f (discharge area) is arranged on the lower left side of 31c.

A game ball entering the second variable winning device 31 is first detected by the second count switch 85 as entering. Here, when the probability variable region solenoid for operating the probability variable region blade member 31d is ON, the probability variable region blade member 31d moves to a position (open position) retracted further from the board surface, and the game ball is guided to the probability variable area hole 31e. On the other hand, when the probability variable region solenoid for operating the probability variable region blade member 31d is OFF, the probability variable region blade member 31d moves to a position (closed position) protruded to the front side from the board surface, so that the game The ball passes through the upper portion of the blade member 31d for the variable probability region and is guided to the discharge port 31f.

[Probable variable area (specific area)]
Further, a variable probability region (no reference numeral) is provided inside the variable probability region hole 31e. The variable probability area is an area through which the game ball cannot pass when the second variable winning device 31 is in a closed state, and the blade member 31d for the variable probability region operates when the second variable winning device 31 is in an open state. If it is, it is an area through which the game ball can pass.

There is a possibility that the variable probability area blade member 31d will operate during the big hit game. The operation pattern of the variable probability region blade member 31d opens the variable probability region for a short period of time (for example, 0.1 seconds) at the same time as the start of the round, and then closes the variable probability region for a long period of time after closing it for several seconds (about 2 to 3 seconds). Apply either a long open pattern that opens long (for example, about 20 seconds) or a short open pattern that only opens the probability variable area for a short period of time (for example, 0.1 seconds) at the start of the round. . Which operation pattern to operate the variable probability area blade member 31d can be selected according to the winning pattern. Specifically, a long open pattern for long opening the probability variable area is selected when the probability variable pattern is won, and a short open pattern for short opening the probability variable area is selected when the normal pattern is won.

In addition, the operation pattern of the probability variable region blade member 31d applies only the pattern in which the probability variable region blade member 31d opens long, and when the first variable winning device 30 opens short and the round ends, the probability variable region It is also possible to eliminate the opportunity for the blade member 31d to open for a long time. In addition, since the game ball does not reach the variable probability region blade member 31d in the short-term opening executed at the same time as the start of the round, it is difficult for the game ball to be guided to the probability variable region by this operation.

Then, when the game ball passes through the variable probability area during the big win game, the state is shifted from the low probability state to the high probability state after the big win game ends. At this time, the state may be shifted from the non-time-reduction state to the time-reduction state (high-probability time-reduction state). On the other hand, when the game ball does not pass through the variable probability area during the big win game, the state shifts to a low probability state after the big win game is over. At this time, the state may be shifted from the non-time-reduction state to the time-reduction state (low-probability time-reduction state).

A performance unit 40 is installed on the game board unit 8 from its central position to its right side. The effect unit 40 has an upper edge 40a that functions as a guide member for changing the direction of flow of the game ball, and has various decorative parts 40b and 40c inside. The decorative parts 40b and 40c enhance the decorativeness of the game board unit 8 by their three-dimensional shape, and can perform dramatic actions by emitting transmitted light from, for example, built-in light emitters (LEDs, etc.). . In addition, a liquid crystal display 42 (image display) is installed inside the production unit 40, and various production images are displayed on the liquid crystal display 42, including production patterns corresponding to special patterns. . Thus, the game board unit 8 impresses the player with the features of the pachinko machine 1 based on the configuration of the board surface and the decorativeness of the effect unit 40. - 特許庁Further, when the game board 8b is a transparent resin board (for example, an acrylic board) as in the present embodiment, various decorations (including movable bodies and light-emitting bodies) are arranged not only on the front side but also behind the game board 8b. ) can add decorativeness. A ring-shaped logo LED unit 900 is arranged in front of the liquid crystal display 42 .

In addition, inside the production unit 40, a drive source (for example, a motor, a solenoid, etc.) is attached together with a movable body 40f for production (for example, an ornament imitating the shape of a spade). The rendering movable body 40f can execute rendering involving the action of a tangible object, in addition to the rendering using an image by the liquid crystal display 42 and the rendering by the light emitting device. The effect using these movable bodies 40f can exert appealing power different from the effect using a two-dimensional image.

A ball guide passage 40d is formed on the left edge of the effect unit 40, and a rolling stage 40e is formed on the lower edge thereof. The ball guide passage 40d is opened diagonally upward to the left in the game area 8a, and when a game ball flowing down in the game area 8a randomly flows into the ball guide passage 40d, it passes through the interior and rolls. It is released onto the stage 40e. The upper surface of the rolling stage 40e has a smooth curved surface, on which the game ball can freely roll in the horizontal direction. The game ball rolling on the rolling stage 40e eventually flows down into the lower game area 8a. A ball discharge path 40k is formed at the center position of the rolling stage 40e, and the game ball guided to the ball discharge path 40k from the rolling stage 40e easily flows into the medium start winning opening 26 directly below. . At the entrance of the ball guide passage 40d, a blade member that is always movable by a solenoid (not shown) is arranged. A device for sorting whether to induce or not) may be arranged.

In addition, an out port 32 is formed in the game area 8a, and game balls that do not enter (win a prize) in various winning ports are finally collected to the back side of the game board unit 8 through the out port 32.例文帳に追加In addition, including the game ball entering the normal winning openings 22, 24, the middle starting winning opening 26, the right starting winning opening 28a, the first variable winning device 30, and the second variable winning device 31, is driven into the game area 8a. All the game balls that are caught are recovered to the back side of the game board unit 8.例文帳に追加The collected game balls are discharged out of the frame from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 through an out passage assembly (not shown), and join the replenishment route of the island facility (not shown).

[Visibility of the upper end of the outer rail]
84 is a schematic diagram showing a cross-sectional view along line AA of FIG. 81. FIG. FIG. 84 shows a cross section taken along a plane parallel to the vertical direction and the front-rear direction passing through the upper end of the game area 8a (the top, the upper end of the outer peripheral surface 502 (outer rail)). The cross section shown in FIG. 84 also passes through the upper end (top) of the inner peripheral surface 504 (inner rail) and the upper end (top) of the rear end of the lower surface 852 of the decorative unit 800 (design member).

The rear end of the lower surface 852 of the decoration unit 800 is located below the upper end of the game area 8a in the portion corresponding to the upper end of the game area 8a (the front portion of the upper end of the game area 8a). That is, the rear end of the lower surface 852 of the decoration unit 800 is located below the upper end of the upper surface 840a of the guide passage 500. As shown in FIG. Also, the rear end of the lower surface 852 of the decoration unit 800 is located above the upper end of the lower surface 840b of the guide passage 500. As shown in FIG. In addition, the rear end of the lower surface 852 of the decoration unit 800 is positioned above the lower end of the game ball X (the game ball in contact with the upper end of the upper surface 840a of the guide passage 500) positioned at the upper end of the game area 8a. are doing. More specifically, it is located above the center of the game ball X in this state (the position indicated by the dashed line Y in FIG. 84).

In addition, the protruding portion 856 protrudes downward from the center of the game ball X positioned at the upper end of the game area 8a. That is, the lower end of the projecting portion 856 is located below the center of the game ball X in this state. More specifically, the lower end of the projecting portion 856 is located below the lower end of the game ball X in this state. Also, the protruding portion 856 protrudes downward from the upper end of the lower surface 840b of the guide passage 500 .

As is clear from the above, the decoration unit 800 overlaps the game ball X positioned at the upper end of the game area 8a in the front-rear direction (the direction perpendicular to the game board unit 8 and the glass unit G). , to cover the entire game ball X in that state. In addition, in the decoration unit 800, the portion corresponding to the upper end of the game area 8a at the rear end of the lower surface 852 (the front portion of the upper end of the game area 8a) extends in the front-rear direction (the direction perpendicular to the game board unit 8 and the glass unit G). , at least the lower half of the game ball X positioned at the upper end of the game area 8a is not overlapped, and at least the lower half of the game ball in this state is not covered. A rear portion of the lower surface 852 is an inclined surface 854 . Therefore, even when the game ball is positioned at the upper end of the game area 8a, the player can easily visually recognize the game ball rolling in the game area 8a. Here, it is preferable that at least the lower half of the game ball in this state can be seen from a predetermined position, specifically from the player's eye point, without the player moving his or her face up, down, left, or right. A player's eye point means the position of the player's eyes when playing a game while sitting on a chair. Specifically, for example, when the distance between the glass unit G and the player's eyes in the front-rear direction is less than 50 to 90 cm, at least a portion of the game ball in this state is maintained without the player moving his or her face up, down, left, or right. (Lower half) should be visible. That is, the decoration unit 800 is arranged on a straight line from a predetermined point at a distance of less than 50 to 90 cm from the glass unit G to the game ball X located at the upper end of the game area 8a (the part below the center of the game ball X). It should be designed so that it does not get wet.

The following features can be derived from the configuration of FIG. The gaming machine may include at least one of the following parenthesized configurations.
(1) Equipped with a front frame (integrated door unit 4) having a design part (top lens part, decorative unit 800) on the upper part and an inner frame (inner frame assembly 7) having a game board (game board unit 8). It is a game machine that has
(2) A game area 8a is formed on the game board.
(3) Above the game area 8a, there is a guide passage 500 that guides the game ball to the right hitting area.
(4) The guide passage 500 has an outer peripheral surface (an outer peripheral surface 502, the upper surface 840a of the guide passage 500) and an inner peripheral surface (an inner peripheral surface 504, the lower surface 840b of the guide passage 500).
(5) Among the lines extending in the direction perpendicular to the game board surface, the line passing through the top of the outer peripheral surface is defined as the first reference line L1.
(6) Among the vertical lines intersecting the first reference line L1 (among the portions where the vertical lines with respect to the first reference line L1 can intersect, among the portions where the vertical line intersecting with the first reference line L1 intersects the design part), the design The rearmost part of the lower surface of the part is defined as a first design part D1.
(7) Among the vertical lines intersecting the first reference line L1 (among the portions where the vertical lines with respect to the first reference line L1 can intersect, among the portions where the vertical line intersecting with the first reference line L1 intersects the design part), the design The lowermost portion on the lower surface of the part is defined as a second design part D2.
(8) The first design portion D1 is located below the first reference line L1, and the distance (dimension A) from the first reference line L1 is equal to or less than the diameter of the game ball (4 mm). The game ball has a diameter of about 11 mm.
(9) The second design portion D2 is located below the first reference line L1, and the distance (dimension B) from the first reference line L1 is equal to or greater than the diameter of the game ball (40 mm).
The second design portion D2 is located below the first reference line L1, and the distance (dimension B) from the first reference line L1 is equal to or greater than the diameter of the game ball, so the design portion can be enlarged. can.
In addition, even though the design part is enlarged in this way, by setting the distance between the first reference line L1 and the first design part D1 to be equal to or less than the diameter of the game ball, when the game ball is hit strongly (the game ball passage ), visibility of the game ball can be ensured.

(10) Of the lines extending perpendicular to the game board surface, the portion located directly below the top of the outer peripheral surface on the inner peripheral surface (the portion on the right side of point B, the portion on the left side of point B, the portion that will be point B ) is defined as a second reference line L2.
(11) Among the vertical lines intersecting the second reference line L2 (among the portions where the vertical lines with respect to the second reference line L2 can intersect, among the portions where the vertical line intersecting with the second reference line L2 intersects the design part), the design The rearmost part of the lower surface of the part is defined as a first design part D1.
(12) Among the vertical lines intersecting the second reference line L2 (among the portions where the vertical lines with respect to the second reference line L2 can intersect, among the portions where the vertical line intersecting with the second reference line L2 intersects the design part), the design The lowermost portion on the lower surface of the part is defined as a second design part D2.
(13) The first design portion D1 is located above the second reference line L2, and the distance (dimension C) from the second reference line L2 is equal to or greater than the radius of the game ball (14 mm).
(14) The second design portion D2 is located below the second reference line L2, and the distance (dimension D) from the second reference line L2 is equal to or greater than the diameter of the game ball (22 mm).
The second design portion D2 is located below the second reference line L2, and the distance (dimension D) from the second reference line L2 is equal to or greater than the diameter of the game ball, so the design portion can be enlarged. can. In addition, even though the design portion is enlarged in this way, by setting the distance between the second reference line L2 and the first design portion D1 to be equal to or larger than the radius of the game ball, when the game ball is weakly launched (the game ball path When the game ball rolls along the bottom surface of the), visibility of the game ball can be ensured.
By adopting such a configuration, the visibility of the game board surface can be ensured by the structure.

[Arrangement of positioning holes for outer rail]
FIG. 85 is a diagram showing an outer rail. FIG. 86 is a diagram showing a game board, an outer rail and a rail base. FIG. 87 is a diagram showing how a game ball contacts the outer rail. FIG. 88 is a diagram showing an outer rail and a game board.
As shown in FIG. 85, the outer rail 600 is a bendable thin plate-shaped horizontally long member. The outer rail 600 is formed with a plurality of predetermined guide portions 601 (holes) for guiding the mounting position to the game board (rail base 700). Further, the outer rail 600 is formed with a plurality of holes 602 that are used when the outer rail 600 is machined. Hole 602 is smaller in size than guide 601 .

A distance Wc from the center of the predetermined guide portion 601 (hole) to the end of the outer rail 600 (lower end in the drawing) is set to 2.7 mm. In other words, the predetermined guide portion 601 is arranged at a position where a game ball rolling on the inner guide surface of the outer rail 600 does not hit it. More specifically, all the predetermined guide portions 601 are arranged at positions where game balls rolling on the inner guide surface of the outer rail 600 do not hit.

As shown in FIG. 86, a rail base 700 is arranged in front of the game board 8b, and a curved outer rail 600 is arranged on a curved guide surface 702 inside the rail base 700. As shown in FIG. A plurality of projecting portions 701 are formed on the guide surface 702 at positions corresponding to the predetermined guide portions 601 .

As shown in FIG. 87, the outer rail 600 is arranged on the guide surface 702 of the rail base 700 . The projecting portion 701 of the rail base 700 is inserted into the predetermined guide portion 601 of the outer rail 600 , thereby positioning the outer rail 600 on the rail base 700 . Here, the projecting portion 701 is arranged at a position where it does not come into contact with the game ball X. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 88, the outer rail 600 is arranged in front of the game board 8b, and passes from the starting end (PS) of the lower left outer rail 600 through the left end (PL) of the left outer rail 600 to the upper It is curved to pass through the upper end (PU) of the outer rail 600 and reach the end (PE) of the upper right outer rail 600 .

The following features can be derived from the configuration shown in these figures. The gaming machine may include at least one of the following parenthesized configurations.
(1) A game machine comprising a game board (game board unit 8, game board 8b, rail base 700) forming a game area and an outer rail 600 provided on the game board.
(2) The outer rail 600 has predetermined guide portions 601 (many holes for inserting the protrusions 701, holes for attaching positioning pins, cutouts for fitting the protrusions 701) for guiding the mounting position to the game board. are formed. Further, the outer rail 600 is formed with holes 602 that are used when the outer rail 600 is machined.
(3) In a state where the outer rail 600 is provided on the game board, the range from the starting end (PS) to the left end (PL) of the outer rail 600 is defined as the first range (H1), and the left end (PL) of the outer rail 600 to the upper end (PU) is defined as a second range (H2), and the range from the upper end (PU) to the terminal end (PE) of the outer rail 600 is defined as a third range (H3).
(4) The number of predetermined guide portions 601 is greater in the first range (H1) (eg, 3) than in the second range (H2) (eg, 2), and is larger than the third range (H3) (for example, 0).

As a result, a large number of predetermined guide portions 601 are arranged on the side of the ball launching device, which receives a large impact from the game ball and requires particularly accurate placement of the outer rail 600, and the deviation of the outer rail 600 on the side of the ball launching device is prevented. and vibration can be reliably prevented.
In addition, a small number of predetermined guide portions 601 are arranged on the end side of the outer rail 600, which receives less impact from the game ball and has less influence on the game, so that the outer rail 600 can be easily processed and attached to the rail base 700. can do.

(5) In place of (4) above, the number of predetermined guide portions 601 is greater than or equal to the second range (H2) in the first range (H1), and the third number in the second range (H2). range (H3) or more.
(6) In place of (4) above, the number of predetermined guide portions 601 is greater than or equal to the third range (H3) in the first range (H1), and the third range (H2) in the second range (H2). range (H3) or more.
(7) In place of (4) above, the number of predetermined guide portions 601 is greater than or equal to the second range (H2) in the first range (H1), range (H3) or more.
(8) Predetermined guide portions 601 are not formed at the upper vertex (PU) and left vertex (PL) of the outer rail 600 .

(9) The predetermined guide portion 601 is not formed in the third range (H3).
(10) The predetermined guide portion 601 is formed at a position where the game ball does not come into contact (for example, a position away from the trajectory where the game ball contacts).
(11) The outer rail 600 is supported along the guide surface 702 of the rail base 700, and the guide surface 702 of the rail base 700 is inclined so that the game ball is less likely to flow forward.
(12) The predetermined guide portions 601 are arranged at uneven intervals.

(13) In place of the above (3) and (4), the range from the starting end (PS) to the left end (PL) of the outer rail 600 is defined as the fourth range (H4 ), and the range from the left end (PL) to the terminal end (PE) of the outer rail 600 is defined as a fifth range (H5). number) is larger than the fifth range (H5) (eg, two).
(14) Instead of the above (3) and (4), in the state where the outer rail 600 is provided on the game board, the range from the start end (PS) to the upper end (PU) of the outer rail 600 is set to the sixth range (H6 ), and the range from the upper end (PU) to the terminal end (PE) of the outer rail 600 is defined as a seventh range (H7), the predetermined number of guide portions 601 is within the sixth range (H6) (for example, five ) is larger than the seventh range (H7) (for example, 0).
(15) Instead of the above (3) and (4), in the state where the outer rail 600 is provided on the game board, the range from the start end (PS) to the middle (PM) of the outer rail 600 is defined as the eighth range (H8 ), and the range from the middle (PM) to the end (PE) of the outer rail 600 is a ninth range (H9), the predetermined number of guide portions 601 is the eighth range (H8) (for example, 4 number) is larger than the ninth range (H9) (eg, one number).
By adopting such a configuration, the trajectory of the game ball can be stabilized, and the game can be played according to the design value.

The invention having the configuration described in [Visibility of the upper end of the outer rail] and the invention having the configuration described in [Arrangement of positioning holes of the outer rail] may be combined. The invention having the configuration, the invention having the configuration described in [Visibility of the upper end of the outer rail], and the invention having the configuration described in [Arrangement of positioning holes of the outer rail] may be combined. As a result, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of stabilizing the trajectory of the game ball and playing the game as designed. In addition, by stabilizing the trajectory of the game ball, it is possible to ensure the visibility of the game ball from the bottom side of the decoration unit.

1 pachinko machine 8 game board unit 8a game area 20 starting gate 28 variable starting winning device 33 normal symbol display device 33a normal symbol working memory lamp 34 first special symbol display device 35 second special symbol display device 34a first special symbol working memory Lamp 35a Second special symbol working memory lamp 38 Game state display device 42 Liquid crystal display 70 Main control device 72 Main control CPU
74 ROMs
76 RAM
124 effect control device 126 effect control CPU
200 7-segment display device 300 storage display device

Claims (2)

A first lottery executing means for executing a first lottery when a first lottery opportunity occurs;
when the first lottery is executed, a first pattern display means for stop-displaying the first pattern in a manner according to the result of the first lottery after variably displaying the first pattern;
difficulty making means for making a second lottery opportunity different from the first lottery opportunity less likely to occur than the first lottery opportunity in a predetermined game state;
a second lottery executing means for executing a second lottery when the second lottery opportunity occurs;
second pattern display means for stop-displaying the second pattern in a manner according to the result of the second lottery after variably displaying the second pattern when the second lottery is executed;
a specific effect execution means that can execute a specific effect based on the second lottery opportunity in the predetermined game state,
The specific production is
When a predetermined condition is satisfied, even if the second lottery opportunity occurs in the predetermined game state, it is not executed,
a game board forming a game area;
and an outer rail provided on the game board,
The outer rail is formed with a plurality of predetermined guide portions for guiding the mounting position to the game board,
In a state where the outer rail is provided on the game board, the range from the start end to the left end of the outer rail is set as a first range, the range from the left end to the upper end of the outer rail is set as a second range, and the outer rail is set to a second range. Assuming that the range from the top end of the rail to the end is the third range,
the number of the predetermined guide portions is greater in the first range than in the second range, and greater in the second range than in the third range ;
The predetermined guide portion is not formed in the third range,
In a state where the outer rail is provided on the game board, if the range from the left end to the terminal end of the outer rail is defined as a fourth range,
A gaming machine, wherein the number of the predetermined guide portions is larger in the first range than in the fourth range. A first lottery executing means for executing a first lottery when a first lottery opportunity occurs;
when the first lottery is executed, a first pattern display means for stop-displaying the first pattern in a manner according to the result of the first lottery after variably displaying the first pattern;
difficulty making means for making a second lottery opportunity different from the first lottery opportunity less likely to occur than the first lottery opportunity in a predetermined game state;
a second lottery executing means for executing a second lottery when the second lottery opportunity occurs;
second pattern display means for stop-displaying the second pattern in a manner according to the result of the second lottery after variably displaying the second pattern when the second lottery is executed;
a specific effect execution means that can execute a specific effect based on the second lottery opportunity in the predetermined game state,
The specific production is
When a predetermined condition is satisfied, even if the second lottery opportunity occurs in the predetermined game state, it is not executed,
a game board forming a game area having a left-handed area and a right-handed area ;
and an outer rail provided on the game board,
The outer rail is formed with a plurality of predetermined guide portions for guiding the mounting position to the game board,
In a state where the outer rail is provided on the game board, the range from the start end to the left end of the outer rail is set as a first range, the range from the left end to the upper end of the outer rail is set as a second range, and the outer rail is set to a second range. Assuming that the range from the top end of the rail to the end is the third range,
the number of the predetermined guide portions is greater in the first range than in the second range, and greater in the second range than in the third range ;
a front frame on which a design portion is formed;
a guide passage disposed above the game area, having an outer peripheral surface and an inner peripheral surface, and guiding a game ball to the right-handed area;
Among the lines extending in the direction perpendicular to the board surface of the game board, a line passing through the top of the outer peripheral surface is defined as a first reference line,
Among the portions where the vertical line with respect to the first reference line can intersect, the rearmost portion on the lower surface of the design portion is the first design portion,
Among the portions where the vertical lines with respect to the first reference line intersect, if the lowermost portion on the lower surface of the design portion is the second design portion,
The first design portion is located below the first reference line, and the distance from the first reference line is equal to or less than the diameter of the game ball,
The gaming machine, wherein the second design portion is positioned below the first reference line and is at a distance from the first reference line equal to or greater than the diameter of a game ball.

Images